# embedding_metadata

key: chroma:document
string_value:
LOWER : Sets the number of pots that are to be occupied under the reference pot.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set. (Use this item when the magazine is of the matrix type.)
Key operations
- Operations in the standard mode
MDI key operations
Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value.
Moves the cursor up on the screen.
Moves the cursor down on the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1266 -
Moves the cursor left on the screen.
Moves the cursor right on the screen.
Soft key operations
Soft key [NO.SRH]
Moves the cursor on a tool geometry number when pressed after the number is entered.
Soft key [EDIT]
Enters the data edit mode.
Soft key [F INPUT]
Inputs data related to the tool management functions.
This key is available only in the standard mode.
Put the NC in the EDIT mode.
Soft key [ F OUTPUT]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [ F OUTPUT]
Outputs data related to the tool management functions.
This key is available only in the standard mode.
Put the NC in the EDIT mode.
In the management data edit mode, the following key operations are available in addition to the above key 
operations.
- Operations in the edit mode
To edit data, press soft key [EDIT] to enter the edit mode. In the edit mode, “EDITING” is displayed at 
the lower right of the screen.
MDI key operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MDI key operation
Actually writes a value entered using numeric keys.
Soft key operation
Soft key [END]
Ends the data edit mode.
Example
Set the edit mode. When the tool geometry with tool geometry number 1 occupies 1 pot in the left 
direction, 0.5 pots in the right direction, and 1.5 pots in the down direction, set data as shown in the figure 
below:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1267 -
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (b) Example of setting data on the tool geometry data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Display of occupied pots in the magazine management table
Each pot occupied by a tool stored in another pot is indicated with an asterisk (*).
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (c) Magazine management table (10.4-inch display unit)
If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displayed. xxxx indicates the tool number of 
each of the two tools. If a tool is determined to interfere with multiple tools, only the first tool detected by 
the NC interference check is displayed.
If a tool is determined to interfere with the frame of a magazine, the tool number of the tool to be stored 
and “FRAME” are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1268 -
- Search for an empty pot for an oversize tool
In the management data edit mode, press soft key [(OPRT)], then continuous menu key displays the 
soft keys for searching for an empty pot for an oversize tool.
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (d) Searching for an empty pot for an oversize tool (10.4-inch display unit)
Enter the tool geometry number in the key-in buffer and press a search soft key. The cursor moves to an 
empty pot fit for the geometry.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
EMPTY-SRCH.N : Searches for an empty pot forward.
EMPTY-SRCH.P : Searches for an empty pot backward.
EMPTY-SRCH : Searches for the pot nearest to the current position.
- Tool management screen
You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between an oversize tool and normal tool. For an oversize 
tool, set a tool geometry number fit for the tool.
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (e) Bit for switching between a normal tool and oversize tool (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1269 -
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (f) Tool geometry number (10.4-inch display unit)
12.3.10 Displaying and Switching the Display Language
The language used for display can be switched to another language.
A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display
language on this screen, the display language can be switched without turning off then on the power.
Displaying and setting the display language
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times.
3 Press soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.
Fig. 12.3.10 (a) LANGUAGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1270 -
4 Press page key or , then press cursor keys or to move the cursor to a 
desired display language.
5 Press operation soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the selected language. The 
language specified on this screen continues to be used if the power is turned off then back on.
Explanation
- Language switching
The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0.
- Selectable languages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Selectable languages
The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows:
1. English
2. Japanese
3. German
4. French
5. Chinese (Traditional)
6. Chinese (Simplified)
7. Italian
8. Korean
9. Spanish
10. Dutch
11. Danish
12. Portuguese
13. Polish
14. Hungarian
15. Swedish
16. Czech
17. Russian
18. Turkish
19. Bulgarian
20. Rumanian
21. Slovak
22. Finnish
23. Vietnamese
24. Indonesian
25. Slovenian


key: chroma:document
string_value:
24. Indonesian
25. Slovenian
Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a 
list of switchable languages. 
Limitation
- Language parameter modification on the parameter screen
Which language to use for display is specified with parameter No. 3281. This parameter can be modified 
using the parameter screen as well. However, if a modification is made on the parameter screen, the new


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting is not reflected until “APPLY” operation is performed on the language screen or the power is 
turned on again. If an invalid value is set in parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen, the screen is 
displayed in English after the power is turned on again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1271 -
12.3.11 Protection of Data at Eight Levels
You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC 
and PMC data.
When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an external unit, the operation 
level is compared with the protection level to determine whether to allow the change or the external 
output.
12.3.11.1 Operation level setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels.
Displaying and setting the operation level setting
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT]. 
The operation level setting screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.1 (a) Operation level setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press soft key [INPUT
PASSWD].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PASSWD].
5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press soft key [CANCEL PASSWD].
Explanation
- Operation level setting
To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal.
To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password.
Table 12.3.11.1 Operation level setting
Operation level Setting Sample grouping
7 (high) Password -
6 Password MTB


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1272 -
Operation level Setting Sample grouping
5 Password Dealer and integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (level 1)
2 Memory protection key signal User level (level 2)
1 Memory protection key signal User level (level 3)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (level 4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains unchanged until the password is cleared.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
NOTE
When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each 
entered character.
12.3.11.2 Password modification
The current operation level is displayed.
The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified.
Displaying and setting the password modification screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT]. 
4 Press soft key [PASSWORD]. 
The PASSWORD CHANGE screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.2 (a) PASSWORD CHANGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1273 -
6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified, then press 
soft key [INPUT].
7 Key in a new password, then press soft key [INPUT].
8 Key in the new password again for confirmation, then press soft key [INPUT].
9 Press soft key [PASSWD CHANGE].
10 To clear the password, press soft key [PASSWD CLEAR].
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input.
NOTE
1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters 
are available:
- Uppercase alphabetic characters
- Numeric characters
2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each 
entered character.
3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is 
determined as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
determined as follows:
- Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
- Password of the current operation level
Can be changed.
- Password of an operation level lower than the current operation level
Can be changed (only to the initial password).
4 The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
12.3.11.3 Protection level setting
The current operation level is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed.
Confirmation based on protection level setting
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT]. 
4 Press soft key [DATA LEVEL] to change the protection level of CNC data or press soft key [PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1274 -
The following protection level change screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.3 (a) Protection level change screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item. 
6 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [INPUT].
NOTE
When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to 
switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC.
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of 
the data item cannot be changed.
The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level higher than the current
operation level.
For each of the following types of data, you can set a data protection level. There are the following two 
types of data protection levels:
- Change protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Output protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit.
As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high).
Table 12.3.11.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data
Type of data
Initial protection level
Change Output
Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO>
(including variable data dedicated to the macro executor) 0 0
Periodical maintenance data <PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DATA> 0 0
Tool management data <TOOL LIFE TIME DATA> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Tool offset data <TOOL OFFSET DATA>
(For each type when tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are 
treated differently)
0 0
Clock data <TIME> 0 0
Workpiece origin shift amount data <WORK ZERO SHIFT> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1275 -
Type of data
Initial protection level
Change Output
Workpiece origin offset data <WORK ZERO OFFSET> 0 0
Ethernet setting data <ETHER NET SETTING> 0 0
Parameter data <PARAMETER DATA> 4 0
Settings <SETTING DATA> 0 0
Pitch error compensation data <PITCH ERROR DATA> 4 0
Parameter data for Power Mate CNC manager function
<PARAMETER DATA FOR POWER MATE CNC MANAGER> 0 0
Each part program <PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Part program editing operation <CHANGE PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0
Table 12.3.11.3 (b) Protection level of PMC data
Type of data Initial protection level
Change Output
Composition parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (each path) 0 0
Sequence program 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
I/O configuration 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
I/O configuration 0 0
I/O Link group selection 0 0
Registration of I/O device 0 0
NOTE
1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided.
2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the 
protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current 
operation level.
4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option 
configuration.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
configuration.
5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming 
Manual (B-64513EN)”.
6 Data related to tool information on the EACH TOOL DATA screen for the tool 
management function is protected by protecting tool offset data.
7 The type of tool offset data put in effect varies depending on the tool 
compensation value memory used.
8 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM 
FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9 Part program editing includes program editing for the MDI mode.
10 Presetting absolute coordinates causes preset workpiece coordinate system 
values to be protected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1276 -
NOTE
11 During tool offset data input/output, if any tool offset data type is not allowed to 
be changed or output to the outside, it is processed as follows:
- Input : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is 
changed.
- Output : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is output.
12.3.11.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection 
level of a program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
level of a program
The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the directory screen.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program can be changed.
Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER]. 
The program folder screen shown below is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.11.4 (a) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press soft key [DETAIL ON]. The screen display switches to the detail display screen.
5 Move the cursor to a desired program.
6 Press the continuous menu key several times until [CHANGE ATTR] is displayed.
7 Press soft key [CHANGE ATTR]. 
8 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [CHANGE LEVEL].
9 To change the output protection level, key in a new desired level, then press soft key [OUT 
LEVEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1277 -
Explanation
The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as “CHANGE 
PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL”.
NOTE
1 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the 
protection level cannot be changed.
2 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current 
operation level.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation level.
3 A protection level can be set only for those part programs that are held on the 
“CNC_MEM” device.
12.3.12 Precision Level Selection
An intermediate precision level between the parameters for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and 
the parameters for emphasis on precision (precision level 10) set on the machining parameter tuning 
screen (AI contour) can be selected. As shown in the Fig. 12.3.12 (a), since the levels are proportionally


key: chroma:document
string_value:
linear, by selecting an intermediate level, optimal parameters can be automatically calculated to perform 
machining.
Value
RMS value
 1 10 Precision level
(RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value)
Fig. 12.3.12 (a) Image of “level”


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1278 -
Procedure for precision level selection
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press soft key [PRECI LEVEL].
Fig. 12.3.12 (b) Precision level selection screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 To change the precision level, key in a desired precision level (1 to 10), then press the key on 
the MDI unit.
5 When the precision level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the velocity-emphasized


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter set and precision-emphasized parameter set for parameter modification.
For the modified parameters, see the description of the machining parameter tuning.
6 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several 
times to display the screen for the axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1279 -
12.3.13 Machining Level Selection
12.3.13.1 Smoothing level selection
An intermediate smoothing level between the parameters for smoothing level 1 and the parameters for 
smoothing level 10 set on the machining parameter tuning screen (smoothing) can be selected. As shown 
in the Fig. 12.3.13.1 (a), since the levels are proportionally linear, by selecting an intermediate level,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
optimal parameters can be automatically calculated to perform machining.
Value
1 10 Smoothing level
RMS value
Fig. 12.3.13.1 (a) Image of “level”
Procedure for smoothing level selection
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press soft key [PRECI LEVEL]. 
4 Press soft key [SMOOTH LEVEL].
Fig. 12.3.13.1 (b) Smoothing level selection screen (10.4inch)
5 To change the smoothing level, key in a desired smoothing level (1 to 10), then press the key 
on the MDI unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1280 -
6 When the smoothing level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the smoothing level 1 
parameter set and smoothing level 10 parameter set for parameter modification.
For the modified parameters, see the description of the machining parameter tuning.
7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several 
times to display the screen for the axis.
12.3.13.2 Precision level selection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For details of precision level selection, See Subsection, “Precision Level Selection”.
12.3.14 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data
Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be 
grasped. Also on the screen, tool life management data can be edited. The screen is either:
- Tool life management (list screen) or
- Tool life management (group editing screen)
Overview
EDIT
END
Group editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
END
Group editing screen
Tool life management (list screen)
Displayed items:
- NEXT GROUP - USING GROUP
- SELECTED GROUP - COUNT OVERRIDE
- GROUP NO. - COUNT TYPE
- LIFE - LIFE COUNT
- TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS - TOOL NO.
- GROUP TO BE CHANGE
Functions:
- Searching for groups
- Clearing execution data
- Setting the tool life counter
List screen
Tool life management (group editing screen)
Displayed items:
- NEXT GROUP - USING GROUP
- SELECTED GROUP - GROUP NO.
- MAX.TOOL PIECES - COUNT TYPE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- MAX.TOOL PIECES - COUNT TYPE
- LIFE - LIFE COUNT
- T-CODE - H-CODE and D-CODE
- TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS
Functions:
- Setting tool data - Deleting group data
- Setting a tool status - Deleting tool data
- Selecting tool skip - Searching for groups
- Setting a life count type, life value, and tool life
counter
Pressing horizontal soft key [EDIT] or [END] 
switches from the list screen to the group editing 
screen or vice versa.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1281 -
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1), the following 
parameters can be used to display arbitrary groups and remaining set values.
- If bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1
An arbitrary group is displayed on the list and group editing screens.
- If bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1
Remaining set values are displayed on the group editing screen. The group editing screen always


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displays H and D codes.
T
The T series is provided with two tool change types, turret type and ATC type. For the T series, displays 
vary depending on which tool change type is in use.
If the turret type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0)
- Neither the H code nor the D code is used; neither is displayed.
- No arbitrary group can be used; no arbitrary group is displayed.
If the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The D code is displayed on the group editing screen.
- If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and bit 5 
(TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1, arbitrary groups are displayed on the list and group editing 
screens.
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No.6805 = 1) and bit 3 (GRP) 
or parameter No. 6802 = 1, remaining set values are displayed on the group editing screen.
12.3.14.1 Tool life management (list screen)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This screen can display the life management status of all tools in tool groups and whether the life of the 
tool groups has expired. It also enables you to set tool life counters and clear execution data.
Displays on the list screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [TOOL LIFE].
3 Press soft key [TOOL LIFE]. 
Fig. 12.3.14.1 (a) Displaying tool life management (list screen) (10.4-inch display unit)
(A)
(B)
(C)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1282 -
- Contents of (A)
(A) displays tool group numbers and an override value. If there is no tool group to display, ****, instead 
of tool group numbers, is displayed.
NEXT GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is started by the next M06 command.
USING GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way.
SELECTED GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life


key: chroma:document
string_value:
counting has been performed most recently.
COUNT OVERRIDE : “1.0TIMES” is displayed if the tool life counter override signal is disabled (bit 2 
(LFV) of parameter No. 6801 = 0).
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and 
SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather 
than the tool group number.
- Contents of (B)
(B) displays the set life value, the current content of the tool life counter, and the registered tool numbers


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(in the order they are used) for each tool group. If the life count type is specification by duration, the 
measurement unit used in displaying and specifying set life values and tool life counter values is selected 
according to the setting of bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 as listed below.
Bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 0 1
Measurement unit used in displaying and specifying set life values and tool 
life counter values
1 minute 0.1 minutes


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 minute 0.1 minutes
The following table lists the prefixes used with tool numbers.
Tool status Tool in use Tool not in use
Life remaining @ No indication
Skip # #
Life expired * *
NOTE
1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @.
2 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 = 0, a tool number remains prefixed with @
even if the life of the tool has expired until another tool is selected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 =1, the following differences can occur 
depending on the type of the life counter in use.
- If the life counter type is specification by duration, the prefix is changed to “*” 
(life expired) as soon as the tool life expires.
- If the life counter type is specification by count, the counter is incremented by 
one at the end of a program (such as M02 or M30). So, the prefix is not


key: chroma:document
string_value:
changed to “*” (life expired) even if the tool life counter matches the life value. 
The symbol “*” (life expired) appears when the tool life count is incremented 
after the CNC is reset.
4 If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 = 1, the symbol “*” indicating the expiration 
of the life of the last tool appears on the tool life management screen when the 
life counter for the last tool of the tool group of interest matches the life value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This way, the information about the last tool in the FOCAS2 or PMC window 
indicates that the life of the tool has expired if the tool change signal TLCH 
<Fn064.0> is 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1283 -
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, an arbitrary group number is displayed in the parentheses beside 
the tool group number. If no arbitrary group number is specified, “********” is displayed instead.
Fig. 12.3.14.1 (b) Displaying arbitrary group numbers
Arbitrary group numbers are enabled by setting the following parameters.
M
- The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Arbitrary group numbers are enabled (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1).
T
- The current tool change type is ATC (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1).
- The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1).
- Arbitrary group numbers are enabled (bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1).
- Contents of (C)
(C) displays tool group numbers for which a tool change signal has been issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If there are so many tool group numbers that all the numbers cannot be displayed, some are omitted, and 
“>>“ is displayed instead.
If there is no tool group number in need of change, “****” is displayed.
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group number in need of change is 
represented with an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number.
Setting data on the list screen
Tool life management data can be specified in the reset state (both the OP and RST signals are “0”).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, setting bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 6804 to 1 enables tool life management data to be specified 
even during automatic operation (the OP signal is “1”).
NOTE
As for USING GROUP or NEXT GROUP settings: 
1) During automatic operation (OP signal = “1” and bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 
6804 = 1), only the tool life counter can be changed.
2) In the reset state (OP signal = “0” and RST signal “0”), the following editing 
operation stops life management because it cannot be continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1284 -
Procedure
- Setting the tool life counter
The tool life counter can be set with a value, using the following methods.
Method 1
1 Place the cursor on the tool life counter for a desired tool group.
2 Enter the value from the keypad.
3 Press soft key [INPUT].
Method 2
1 Place the cursor on the tool life counter for a desired tool group.
2 Enter the value from the keypad.
3 Press key.
- Clearing execution data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Clearing execution data
All existing execution data for a tool group selected by the cursor can be cleared as follows:
1 Place the cursor on the tool group whose execution data you want to clear.
2 Press soft key [ERASE]. 
3 Press soft key [EXEC]. 
NOTE
Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 enables execution data for all 
registered tool groups to be cleared.
- Selecting tool groups
Tool groups can be selected using the following methods.
Method 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Method 1
1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad.
2 Press soft key [NO.SRH]. 
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for 
an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number.
Method 2
1 Press page key or to display desired groups.
2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to the desired group at either the left or right.
- Switching to the group editing screen
Switch to tool life management (group editing screen).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1285 -
12.3.14.2 Tool life management (group editing screen)
On this screen, it is possible to edit tool life management data (such as tool life value, tool life counter, 
and tool data) for the tool group of interest.
Displaying the group editing screen
Procedure
1 Place the cursor on the tool group you want to edit from the list screen.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press soft key [EDIT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [EDIT]. 
Fig. 12.3.14.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and 
a tool life counter value is displayed for the tool group.
- Contents of (A)
Like the counterpart of the list screen, (A) of the editing screen displays the next tool group number and 
override value. If there is no appropriate tool group, **** is displayed instead.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NEXT GROUP : Tool group for which life counting is started by the next M06 command.
USING GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way.
SELECTED GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life 
counting has been performed most recently.
COUNT OVERRIDE : “1.0TIMES” is displayed if the tool life counter override signal is disabled (bit 2 
(LFV) of parameter No. 6801 = 0).
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, NEXT GROUP, USING GROUP, and 
SELECTED GROUP are each represented with an arbitrary group number rather 
than the tool group number.
(A)
(B)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1286 -
- Contents of (B) 
(B) details tool life management data related to a selected tool group as follows:
TYPE : 1 Specification by count
2 Specification by duration
LIFE : Tool life value
COUNT : Tool life counter
STATE : Tool status Tool in use Tool not in use
Life remaining @ No indication
Skip # #
Life expired * *
T-CODE : Tool number
M
H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code
T
H-CODE : No display.
D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code 
if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)
NOTE
1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @.
2 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 = 0, a tool number remains prefixed with @
even if the life of the tool has expired until another tool is selected.
3 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 = 1, the following differences can occur


key: chroma:document
string_value:
depending on the type of the life counter in use.
- If the life counter type is specification by duration, the prefix is changed to “*” 
(life expired) as soon as the tool life expires.
- If the life counter type is specification by count, the counter is incremented by 
one at the end of a program (such as M02 or M30). So, the prefix is not 
changed to “*” (life expired) even if the tool life counter matches the life value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The symbol “*” (life expired) appears when the tool life count is incremented 
after the CNC is reset.
4 If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 = 1, the symbol “*” indicating the expiration 
of the life of the last tool appears on the tool life management screen when the 
life counter for the last tool of the tool group of interest matches the life value. 
This way, the information about the last tool in the FOCAS2 or PMC window


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indicates that the life of the tool has expired if the tool change signal TLCH 
<Fn064.0> is 1.
Displaying arbitrary groups and remaining set values
Fig. 12.3.14.2 (b) Displaying arbitrary group numbers and remaining set values on the editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1287 -
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and the 
following parameters are enabled, arbitrary groups and remaining set values are displayed.
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1)
RESET COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 = 1)
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6802 = 1)
T
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1)
Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0)
OPTION GROUP : No display.
REST COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 = 1)
ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RESET COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 = 1)
Setting data on the group editing screen
Tool life management data can be specified in the reset state (both the OP and RST signals are “0”). 
However, setting bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 6804 to 1 enables tool life management data to be specified 
even during automatic operation (the OP signal is “1”).
The available editing operations are listed below.
M
Items that can be edited Mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Items that can be edited Mode
Setting a life count type, life value, tool life counter, and tool data (T code, H code, and D code) All modes
Adding tool numbers (T code) MDI
Deleting all tool group data at a time MDI
Deleting tool data (status, T code, H code, and D code) MDI
Selecting tool skip MDI
Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set) MDI
T
Items that can be edited Mode
Setting a life count type, life value, tool life counter, and tool data (T code and D code)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, the D code can be edited only if the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 
5040 = 1).
All modes
Adding tool numbers (T code) MDI
Deleting all tool group data at a time MDI
Deleting tool data (status, T code, and D code) MDI
Selecting tool skip MDI
Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set) MDI
If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a tool life value, and a tool life counter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1288 -
NOTE
1 As for USING GROUP or NEXT GROUP editing:
<1> During automatic operation (OP signal = “1” and bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 
6804 = 1), only the tool life counter can be changed.
<2> In the reset state (OP signal = “0” and RST signal “0”), the following editing 
operation stops life management because it cannot be continued.
- Adding tool numbers (T code)
- Deleting all tool group data at a time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Deleting tool data (status, T code, H code, and D code)
2 The following editing operations may set the tool change signal to “1”.
- Selecting tool skip for the last tool.
- Deleting tool numbers, resulting in any tool other than those whose life has 
expired or who have been skipped being not found in the tool group of interest.
3 The following editing operations may reset the tool change signal to “0”.
- Adding tool numbers, leading to tools whose life has not expired being set in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the tool group of interest.
- Selecting tool clear.
Procedure
-Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group 
number, and remaining set value
Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number, and 
remaining set value
Method 1
1 Place the cursor on the desired item.
2 Enter a value from the keypad.
3 Press soft key [INPUT]. 
Method 2
1 Place the cursor on the desired item.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Enter a value from the keypad.
3 Press .
NOTE
1 Changing a tool life value or tool life counter does not affect the tool status or tool 
change signal.
2 Changing a life count type causes the tool life value and too life counter to be 
reset to 0.
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and the 
following parameters are enabled, arbitrary groups and remaining set values can be specified


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1)
RESET COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 = 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1289 -
T
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1)
Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0)
OPTION GROUP : Cannot be set.
RESET COUNT : It is possible to set a remaining set value to be used until a new tool is selected (if bit 
3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1).
ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group numbers can be set (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1).
RESET COUNT : It is possible to set a remaining set value to be used until a new tool is selected (if bit 
3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1).
- Adding tool numbers
Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added.
3 Enter the tool number from the key pad.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press soft key [INSERT]. 
(Example)
Adding tool number 1550 between numbers 1 and 2 (for the M series)
1 Move the cursor to the data for number 1, enter “1550”, and press [INSERT].
2 The entered T code 1550 is inserted in the position of number 2. The H and D codes are reset to 
0.
- Deleting all tool group data at a time
All tool group data can be deleted at a time as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Select the tool group from which you want to delete all tool data at a time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [DELETE]. 
4 Press soft key [GROUP]. 
5 Press soft key [EXEC]. 
- Deleting tool data
Tool data can be deleted from a tool group as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) you want to delete.
3 Press soft key [DELETE]. 
4 Press soft key [<CURS>]. 
NOTE
1 Deleting all tools from a tool group is equivalent to deleting the tool group itself.
2 Deleting a tool indicated with @ (in use) results in @ being moved to the previous


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1290 -
- Selecting tool skip
Tool data can be placed in a skip state as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) of a tool you want to skip.
3 Press soft key [STATE]. 
4 Press soft key [SKIP]. 
- Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set)
Tool data state can be cleared as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) for a tool you want to clear.
3 Press soft key [STATE]. 
4 Press soft key [CLEAR]. 
- Selecting a tool group
A tool group can be selected as follows:
Method 1
1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad.
2 Press soft key [NO.SRH].
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for 
an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number.
Method 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Method 2
1 Press page key or to display the target tool group.
- Switching to the list screen
The tool life management (list screen) can be resumed as follows:
1 Press soft key [END].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1291 -
12.3.15 Displaying and Setting Pattern Data Inputs
Described below are a method for displaying machining menus (pattern menus) created by machine tool 
builders and a method for setting them. The descriptions are based on an example. For actual pattern 
menus and pattern data, refer to manuals released by respective machine tool builders.
Displaying pattern data and pattern menus
Given below is a procedure for displaying pattern menus.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. 
The pattern menu screen shown below appears.
Fig. 12.3.15 (a) Pattern menu screen (10.4-inch display unit)
On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected.
The following two methods can be used to select patterns.
- Using the cursor
1 Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and 
then press soft key [SELECT] or .
- Specifying a pattern number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Specifying a pattern number
1 Enter a number displayed at the left side of a pattern name, and press soft key [SELECT] or 
.
The custom macro screen (pattern data screen) shown below appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1292 -
Fig. 12.3.15 (b) Custom macro screen (pattern data) (10.4-inch display unit)
2 Enter the necessary pattern data, and press .
3 After entering all necessary data, select the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button. 
Machining begins.
Explanation
- Explanations about the pattern menu screen
HOLE PATTERN
An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a menu title.
BOLT HOLE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BOLT HOLE
An arbitrary character string consisting of 10 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern name.
Machine tool builders should program menu title and pattern name character strings, using custom 
macros, and save them in program memory.
- Explanations about the custom macro screen (pattern data screen)
BOLT HOLE
An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern data 
title.
TOOL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
title.
TOOL
An arbitrary character string consisting of 10 or less characters can be displayed as a variable name.
*BOLT HOLE CIRCLE*
The comment text consists of nine 12-character blocks, or the comment can be up to 12 lines 
(10.4-inch display unit) with one block counted as one line.
Machine tool builders should program variable name and comment text character strings, using 
custom macros, and save them in program memory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1293 -
12.3.16 Setting and Displaying Data When the Tool Offset for Milling 
and Turning Function Is Enabled
T
The tool offset for milling and turning function enables offset data to be displayed and operated on a tool 
offset screen common to milling and turning systems.
Setting and displaying tool offset values
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
In multi-path control, select the path for which to set tool offset values, using the path selection 
switch in advance.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [OFFSET]. 
Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool offset screen appears.
Fig. 12.3.16 (a) Tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit)
X : Set the X-axis tool offset value.
Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensation value.
Y : Set the Y-axis tool offset value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOSE R/RAD : Set the tool nose radius compensation value or tool radius compensation value.
T : Set the virtual tool nose direction.
3 Press page and cursor keys to move the cursor to the offset value you want to set or change.
Alternatively, enter the number of the offset value you want to set or change and press soft key 
[NO.SRH].
4 To set the offset value, enter the value and press soft key [INPUT].
To change the offset value, enter a value to be incremented to or decremented from the current


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting and press soft key [+INPUT].
Alternatively, enter a new offset value and press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1294 -
Explanation
- Decimal point programming
The offset value can be entered with a decimal point.
- Another setting method
The tool offset value can be input/output also by using external I/O devices.
See Chapter 8, “DATA I/O”, in Part III.
The tool offset value can also be set by using the direct input of offset value measured B, tool offset value 
counter input, and other functions.
- Number of tool offsets


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Number of tool offsets
128 tool offsets are available as standard.
The number of tool offsets can be optionally expanded to 200.
In a multi-path system, one of the above numbers of tool offsets can be selected for each path.
- Disabling offset value input
By setting bits 0 (WOF) and 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290, the input of tool wear compensation values 
and tool geometry compensation values is disabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The input of the tool offset values in any specified range from the MDI can be disabled by setting the 
number of the first target tool offset value in parameter No. 3294 and the number of target tool offset 
values starting from the first value in parameter No. 3295.
If offset values are entered continuously, they are handled as follows:
1) If an offset value that can be input is input, then an offset value that cannot be input is input, a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
warning is output, but the offset value in the input enable range is set.
2) If an offset value that cannot be input is input, then an offset value that can be input is input, a 
warning is output, and the offset values are not set.
- NOSE R/RAD, T display
When the tool nose radius compensation is disabled (bit 7 (NCR) of parameter No. 8136 is 1), NOSE 
R/RAD, T are not displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1295 -
12.3.17 Eco Setting Screen
Select a desired Eco level before starting machining, after comparing data of power consumption and 
cycletime for each Eco level.
Displaying Eco setting screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [ECO].
3 Press soft key [ECO].
4 Press soft key [ECO SET].
Fig. 12.3.17 (a) Eco setting screen
Explanation
- Display for select an Eco level


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1296 -
The selected Eco level for the current path is also displayed.
Items Contents
Current Eco level The selected Eco level is displayed.
Level Available Eco levels are displayed.
Level 0 means normal machining.
Highlight a desired Eco level and press operation menu soft key [SELECT], and the selected 
Eco level is changed.
Torque override Torque overrides for each level are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Torque overrides for spindle speed control mode, spindle synchronization control mode and 
rigid tapping mode are displayed. Since only one mode can be displayed at a time, pressing 
soft keys [SPNDL SPEED][SPNDL SYNC][RIGID TAP] change displayed mode. Note that, 
when each function is disabled, torque overrides of spindle synchronization control mode or 
rigid tapping mode are not displayed.
If multiple spindles belong to the current path, pressing MDI keys change


key: chroma:document
string_value:
spindles, whose torque overrides are displayed.
NOTE
When an invalid value (out of 0–100%) is specified in the parameter No.11397,
11398 or 5260, torque overrides are displayed as “100” in red, excluding the 
torque override for Eco level 0.
- Graphic display for data
Fig. 12.3.17 (c) Graph for eco setting
Data of each Eco level are displayed in power consumption vs. cycletime.
Data of the current path are displayed.
NOTE
Nothing is displayed without data of Eco level 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Detailed data comparison
Fig. 12.3.17 (d) Comparison of data for eco setting
Detailed data of power consumption and cycletime of each Eco level can be compared here in order to 
select a desired Eco level.
Data of the current path are displayed.
“Light blue” point shows data 
of the selected Eco level.
“Yellow” point shows data of 
the highlighted Eco level.
“Pink” points show data of 
available Eco levels.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1297 -
Items Contents
Level Eco levels are displayed.
Reduction
Reductions in power consumption per cycle are displayed.
Reductions are calculated by using power consumption at normal machining (Eco 
level 0) as the base.
Power consumptions per cycle 
(spindle/servo/others)
Total power consumptions per cycle are displayed.
Power consumptions in spindles, servos and others (peripheral devices) are also 
displayed separately.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed separately.
Cycletime Cycletimes are displayed.
NOTE
1 Power consumption data obtained by actual machining is displayed. Therefore, 0 
is displayed at the first machining or soon after deleting data. Though these data 
depends on parameter settings, machining circumstances and so on, soon after 
changing settings, data obtained before the change is displayed.
2 Here, a “cycle” means one automatic operation.
Operation on Eco setting screen
Procedure
- Select of an Eco level


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Select of an Eco level
Select a desired Eco level with comparing among data of power consumption and cycletime at each Eco 
level.
1 Select MDI mode.
2 Highlight a desired Eco level.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press soft key [SELECT] on operation menu.
The selected Eco level is displayed in “CURRENT ECO LEVEL” and the select is completed.
NOTE
Select an Eco level for each path when the select is available for each path (bit 1 
(EEP) of the parameter No.24303 is set to 1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Deleting data of power consumption and cycletime at each Eco level
Disused data of power consumption and cycletime can be deleted individually or in a batch.
Both individual and batch deletes are effective only on data of the current path.
1 Highlight an Eco level whose data is going to be deleted.
Batch delete does not require this operation.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
3 Press soft key [DELETE] or [DELETE ALL] on operation menu.
If [DELETE] is pressed, individual data is deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If [DELETE ALL] is pressed, all data of the current path are deleted.
Select menu [EXEC]/[CANCEL] is displayed.
4 Press soft key [EXEC].
Data is deleted.
- Switching displayed unit of power consumption
Displayed unit of power consumption can be switched to “kWh” or “Wh”.
Soft key [kWh/Wh] switches the unit to “kWh” or “Wh”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1298 -
- Switching spindle mode whose torque overrides are displayed
The spindle mode whose torque overrides are displayed can be switched by soft keys [SPNDL SPEED],
[SPNDL SYNC] and [RIGID TAP].
When each function is disabled, torque overrides of spindle synchronization control mode or rigid tapping 
mode are not displayed.
- Switching spindle whose torque overrides are displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When multiple spindles belong to the current path, MDI keys can switch the spindle whose 
torque overrides are displayed.
- Change of torque overrides
Torque override for Eco level 3 can be changed.
1 Set bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 to 1.
2 Highlight the torque override for Eco level 3.
3 Select MDI mode or enter state emergency stop for all paths.
4 Release spindle synchronization mode for all paths.
5 Input value by MDI keys.
Available values are integers from 1 to 100.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press soft key [INPUT] or MDI key .
Torque overrides for each Eco level are changed.
CAUTION
Machine or work can be damaged by out-of-synchronization when torque 
overrides of spindles in synchronization control mode differ from each other. This 
is because this function differs the time constant for acceleration/deceleration in 
spindle synchronization mode.
Set a common torque override for spindles belonging to the same group of 
synchronization.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
synchronization.
NOTE
1 Use this operation only for deciding the point of the least power 
consumption.Please refer to “Energy Saving Level Selecting Function “ of 
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64693EN-1) for details.
2 When select of an Eco level is available for each path (bit 1 (EEP) of the 
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), operations 3 and 4 are needed only for the 
current path.
3 When bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 is set to 1, the torque override 
cannot be highlighted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1299 -
12.3.18 Eco Monitoring Screen
Power consumption of machine can be observed comprehensively, such as effects of eco-machining and 
time transition of power consumption.
Displaying Eco monitoring screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [ECO].
3 Press soft key [ECO].
4 Press soft key [ECO MONIT].
Fig. 12.3.18 (a) Eco monitoring screen
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Display of total power consumption
Total power consumption of a machine is displayed, which has been accumulated since the last clear 
operation of total power consumption. This is not cleared even if power is off.
Items Contents
Consumption Accumulated power consumption of a whole machine is displayed.
Reduction Difference between power consumption of normal machining and that of eco-machining is 
accumulated. The accumulated data of all paths are added.
See “Example” below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
See “Example” below.
CO2 equivalent Carbon-dioxide emission equivalent to “Reduction” is displayed.
NOTE
The conversion factor for CO2 equivalent is specified by the parameter No.11399.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1300 -
- Power consumption per cycle (spindle/servo/others)
Power consumption per cycle at the current Eco level is displayed in bar graphs, compared with that of 
normal machining (Eco level 0).
Items Contents
Current The power consumption of a running cycle is displayed and updated in real time.
When nothing is operated, the power consumption of the last cycle is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With multiple paths, summed data of all paths as well as data of the current path can be 
displayed.
Note that the summed data can include only data of paths where both “Normal” and “Current” 
have non-zero values.
Soft keys [EACH PATH] and [ALL PATH] switch the displayed data.
Normal The power consumption of the last cycle at Eco level 0 is displayed.
With multiple paths, summed data of all paths as well as data of the current path can be 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed.
Note that the summed data can include only data of paths where both “Normal” and “Current”
have non-zero values.
Soft keys [EACH PATH] and [ALL PATH] switch the displayed data.
Eco level The selected Eco level is displayed.
When eco-machining is ineffective, “OFF” is displayed.
The Eco level of the current path is displayed.
NOTE
When select of an Eco level is available for each path (bit 1 (EEP) of the 
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), “Eco level” is not displayed during displaying


key: chroma:document
string_value:
summed data of all paths.
- History of power consumption
Time transition of power consumption is displayed in bar graphs, with power consumption categorized 
into that in spindles, servos and others.
Items Contents
History of power consumption Unit selected on operation menu decides displayed values as follows
Units Displayed values
MINUTE Power consumption for a minute is displayed in a bar graph.
Up to 30 minutes’ power consumption can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
30MIN Power consumption for 30 minutes is displayed in a bar graph.
Up to 15 hours’ power consumption can be displayed.
HOUR Power consumption for an hour is displayed in a bar graph.
Up to 30 hours’ power consumption can be displayed.
DAY Power consumption for a day is displayed in a bar graph.
Up to 30 days’ power consumption can be displayed.
TOTAL Total power consumption in each unit is displayed as follows.
Units Contents
MINUTE Power consumption for last 30 minutes is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
30MIN Power consumption for last 15 hours is displayed.
HOUR Power consumption for last 30 hours is displayed.
DAY Power consumption for last 30 days is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1301 -
NOTE
1 Power consumption data obtained by actual machining are displayed. Therefore, 
0 is displayed at the first machining or soon after deleting data. Though these 
data depend on parameter settings, machining circumstances and so on, soon 
after changing settings, data obtained before the change are displayed.
2 Difference between power consumption of normal machining and that of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
current Eco level is added to “Reduction” in total power consumption at every 
cycle end. When no normal cycle finishes after changing parameter settings, 
machining programs and so on, notice that reduction calculated from power 
consumption data of old settings is added to “Reduction”. In addition, with no data 
of normal machining, nothing is added to “Reduction”. See also “Example” below.
Example
The values of “Consumption” and “Reduction” are calculated according to the examples below:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 The case that power consumption of Eco level 0 is equal to 10kWh:
A Given that 8kWh has been consumed at Eco level 2 after clearing total power consumptions.
- “Consumption” = 0 + 8 = 8kWh
- “Reduction” = 0 + (10 - 8) = 2kWh
B Given that, following A. above, 7kWh has been consumed at Eco level 3.
- “Consumption” = 8 + 7 = 15kWh
- “Reduction” = 2 + (10 - 7) = 5kWh
2 The case that a cycle with Eco level 0 has not finished since main program was changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A Given that, following 1.B. above, operating new program has consumed 12kWh at Eco level 2 
(Since main program has been changed, power consumption can be larger than that at Eco level 
0.).
- “Consumption” = 15 + 12 = 27kWh
- “Reduction” = 5 + (10 - 12) = 3kWh
(This is calculated by using data of Eco level 0 obtained before main program was changed.)
3 The case that there is no data of Eco level 0
A Given that, following 2.A above, data of Eco level 0 has been deleted on Eco setting screen and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
then, 7kWh has been consumed at Eco level 3.
- “Consumption” = 27 + 7 = 34kWh
- “Reduction” = 3kWh (Nothing is added without data of Eco level 0.)
With multiple paths, the summation of all paths can be displayed in “Consumption” and “Reduction”, 
these values of each path calculated like examples above.
For example, when consumption and reduction of path 1 are equal to 10kWh and 2kWh, and those of path 
2 are equal to 15kWh and 3kWh, displayed values are as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1302 -
Operation on Eco setting screen
Procedure
- Switching displayed time unit of history of power consumption
Displayed time unit of history of power consumption can be switched into every minute, every 30 
minutes, every hour and every day.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press one of soft keys [MINUTE], [30MIN], [HOUR] and [DAY].
Displayed time unit changes.
- Turning on/off of eco-machining


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Eco-machining and normal machining can be switched by soft key [ECO OFF]/[ECO ON].
Given that Eco level 3 is selected, for example,
- Normal machining is selected by pressing soft key [ECO OFF]. Here, the selected Eco level does not 
change (Eco level 3 is kept).
- After the operation above, eco-machining of Eco level 3 is selected by pressing soft key [ECO ON].
1 Select MDI mode for all paths.
2 Release spindle synchronization mode for all paths.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press soft key [ECO OFF]/[ECO ON].
In case of turning off eco-machining, Eco indicator “ECOX” in Warning area is turned off. Note that 
the current Eco level displayed on Eco setting screen does not change because the selected Eco level 
does not change in this operation.
In case of turning on eco-machining, Eco indicator “ECOX” in Warning area is turned on. Note that 
nothing is displayed when Eco level 0 is selected.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
When select of an Eco level is available for each path (bit 1 (EEP) of the 
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), operations 1 and 2 are needed only for the 
current path.
- Switching displayed unit of power consumption
Displayed unit of power consumption can be switched to “kWh” or “Wh”.
Soft key [kWh/Wh] switches the unit to “kWh” or “Wh”.
- Clearing total power consumption
Displayed total power consumption can be set to 0 and new accumulation is started.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [TOTAL CLEAR].
Select menu [EXEC]/[CANCEL] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [EXEC].
Displayed total power consumptions are set to 0 and “start time” is set to current time
- Switching displayed data in “Power consumption per cycle”
With multiple paths, displayed data in “Power consumption per cycle” can be switched into data of each 
path or summed data of all paths.
Soft key [EACH PATH]/[ALL PATH] can switch the data.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [EACH PATH]/[ALL PATH].
Data in “Power consumption per cycle” is changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1303 -
Limitation
Since this function uses clock, change in clock causes following results.
Note that change in clock requires power off.
- Total power consumption
“From start” changes according to change in clock, though “Consumption”, “Reduction”, “CO2 
equivalent” and “Start time” does not change.
- History of power consumption
If clock changes backward, history of power consumption is entirely set to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If clock changes forward, obtained power consumption and time do not change, though power 
consumption of jumped period is set to 0. If clock is advanced by an hour, for example, power 
consumption of the jumped hour is considered as 0.
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit
12.3.19 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)
Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence 
numbers in program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
See Section, “AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS” for automatic insertion of 
sequence numbers.
See Subsection, “Sequence Number Comparison and Stop” for the sequence number comparison and stop 
function. This subsection describes how to set data.
Setting the setting data
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1304 -
Fig. 12.3.19 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.19 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys .
5 Enter a new value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1305 -
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
- PUNCH CODE
Setting code when data is output through RS-232C interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of RS-232C interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the 
EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 15 FORMAT” in the 
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series : B-64694EN-1) or Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING 
Series 15 FORMAT” in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series : B-64694EN-2).
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the sequence number comparison and 
stop function and the number of the program to which the sequence number belongs.
T
- CCR / DDDP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T
- CCR / DDDP
This setting item is displayed only when the chamfering or corner R and the direct drawing dimension 
programming option are enabled. These functions cannot be use at same time. Setting of which function 
is enabled.
0:Chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1:Direct drawing dimensions programming function is enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1306 -
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING (TIMER) screen. See Subsection, 
“Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)” for this screen.
12.3.20 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Unit)
If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation 
enters single block mode after the block is executed.
Sequence number comparison and stop
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press page key or several times until the screen in the Fig. 12.3.20 (a) is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.20 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program 
containing the sequence number with which operation stops.
6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP (with eight or less digits) the sequence number 
with which operation is stopped.
7 When automatic operation is executed, operation enters single block mode at the block containing 
the sequence number which has been set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1307 -
Explanation
- Sequence number after the program is executed
After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number 
set for sequence number compensation and stop is decremented by one.
- Exceptional blocks
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block in which all commands are those to be 
processed within the CNC control unit, the execution does not stop at that block.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Example] N1 #1=1 ;
N2 IF[#1 EQ 1]GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the 
program does not stop.
- Stop in the canned cycle
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which has a canned cycle command, the 
execution of the program stops after the return operation is completed.
- When the same sequence number is found several times in the program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program 
stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence number is found for the first time is executed.
- Block to be repeated a specified number of times
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which is to be executed repeatedly, the 
execution of the program stops after the block is executed specified times.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1308 -
12.3.21 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined 
parts can be displayed. 
This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of machined parts and 
the time during which the power is on, which can be set only by parameters).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This screen can also display the clock time. The time can be set on the screen.
Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press page key or several times until the screen in the Fig. 12.3.21 (a) is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.21 (a) SETTING (TIMER) screen (15-inch display unit)
5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number 
of parts to be machined.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press horizontal 
soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARTS TOTAL
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is 
executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712.
- PARTS REQUIRED
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the "0" is set to it, there is no limitation to the number of parts.
Also, its setting can be made by the parameter No 6713.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1309 -
- PARTS COUNT
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is 
executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches 
the number of parts required. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- POWER ON
Displays the total time which the power is on. This value cannot be set on this screen but can be preset in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 6750.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
This value can be preset in parameter No. 6751 or No. 6752.
- CUTTING TIME
Displays the total time taken by cutting that involves cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and 
circular interpolation (G02 or G03). This value can be preset in parameter No. 6753 or No. 6754.
- FREE PURPOSE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- FREE PURPOSE
This value can be used, for example, as the total time during which coolant flows. Refer to the manual 
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is 
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is 
turned off.
- DATA and TIME
Displays the current date and time. The date and time can be set on this screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Usage
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of 
machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed 
every time the processing of one part is completed. Furthermore, if an M code set to the parameter No. 
6710 is executed, counting is made in the similar manner. Also, it is possible to disable counting even if


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M02 or M30 is executed (bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1). For details, see the manual 
issued by machine tool builders.
Limitation
- Run time and part count settings
Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of "M" and "S" of run time is valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
- Time settings
Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set.
Table 12.3.21


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 12.3.21
Item Maximum value Item Maximum value
Year 2096 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Second 59


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1310 -
12.3.22 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to 
G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and external workpiece origin offset. 
The workpiece origin offset value and external workpiece origin offset value can be set on this screen.
Displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.22 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch display unit)
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists of two or more pages. 
Display a desired page in either of the following two ways:
- Press the page key or .
- Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, P1 to P48 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 P1 
to G54.1 P48, P1 to P300 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and press 
horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The entered


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value is specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric 
keys and pressing horizontal soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the previous 
offset value.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1311 -
12.3.23 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate 
system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece 
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command values match the actual dimensions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate system with the actual 
coordinate system.
Direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured
Procedure
y
Programmed workpiece 
origin
New offset
Previous offset
Origin
O'
Y
Surface A
Surface B
β
a
X
x
O
Fig. 12.3.23 (a)
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown Fig. 12.3.23 (a), position the reference tool manually until it 
touches surface A of the workpiece.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance a between surface A and the programmed origin of the workpiece coordinate 
system as shown Fig. 12.3.23 (a).
4 Press function key .
5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press vertical soft key [WORK].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1312 -
Fig. 12.3.23 (b) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch display unit)
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.
7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example).
8 Enter the measured value (a) then press horizontal soft key [MEASUR].
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1313 -
12.3.24 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the 
screen. 
The values for variables can be set on this screen. 
Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Displaying and setting custom macro common variables
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [MACRO].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The screen in the Fig. 12.3.24 (a) is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.24 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (15-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods:
- Enter the variable number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
- Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page keys and/or and 
cursor keys , , , and/or .
4 Enter data with numeric keys and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key , , or , then press 
horizontal soft key [INP.C.].
6 To set a blank in a variable, just press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The value field for the variable 
becomes blank.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1314 -
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided.
When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 -Overflow


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the significant number of digits is 8 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 1):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 99999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -99999999 -Overflow
12.3.25 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
interface signals. Data can be read and written in bit and byte units. Before writing a signal, release the 
protection of the corresponding variable on the PMC signal protect screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1315 -
Displaying and setting real time custom macro variables
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [R.TIME MACRO]. 
The screen shown below appears.
Fig. 12.3.25 (a) REAL TIME MACRO screen (15-inch display unit)
3 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are not stored at power-off, press 
vertical soft key [TEMP. DATA].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are stored at power-off, press 
vertical soft key [PERM. DATA].
5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of 
the following methods:
- Enter the number of a real time custom macro variable and press horizontal soft key [NO. 
SRH].
- Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set by 
pressing page keys and/or and cursor keys , , , and/or .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1316 -
Displaying and setting DI/DO variables
Procedure
For setting in byte units:
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [R.TIME MACRO].
3 Press vertical soft key [BYTE SELECT]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.3.25 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following 
methods:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
methods:
- Enter the number and press horizontal soft key [NO. SRH].
- Move the cursor to a desired number by pressing page keys and/or and cursor 
keys , , , and/or .
5 Enter data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1317 -
12.3.26 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel 
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Operations on the MDI unit can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel. 
This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations 
on the MDI unit, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
Displaying and setting the software operator’s panel
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] and then vertical soft key [OPERAT PANEL].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is 
displayed.
Fig. 12.3.26 (a) Without the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.26 (b) With the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1318 -
Fig. 12.3.26 (c) (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .
5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the 
desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys (Fig. 12.3.26 (d)) to perform jog feed. Press the key 
together with an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 12.3.26 (d) MDI arrow keys
Explanation
- Valid operations


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator's panel are shown below. Whether to use each group can be 
chosen using parameter No. 7200. Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator's panel.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification 
Group4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid
When the screen indicates other than the software operator's panel screen and self-diagnosis screen, jog 
feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pressed. This function cannot be used when the virtual MDI 
key function is used.
- Jog feed and arrow keys


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Jog feed and arrow keys
The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys is set with parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1319 -
- General purpose switches
For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
12.3.27 Setting and Displaying Tool Management Data (15/19-inch 
Display Unit)
The tool management function totally manages tool information including tool offsets and tool life 
information.
This function provides a magazine screen and tool management screen. This subsection explains how to 
set these screens.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set these screens.
12.3.27.1 Displaying and setting magazine screen (15/19-inch display 
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
The screen shown below appears.
Fig. 12.3.27.1 (a) Tool management magazine screen (15-inch display unit)
3 By using the page keys , cursor keys , and horizontal soft keys [←] 
and [→], move the cursor to the pot No. position of the magazine for which you want to set or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
modify data.
Alternatively, type the number of the tool management data you wan to set or modify, and press 
horizontal soft key [NO. SRH].
4 Press horizontal soft key [EDIT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1320 -
5 To set the tool management data number of a pot, type the tool management data number, then press 
MDI key .
To delete the tool management data number set for a pot, follow the steps below.
<1> Press horizontal soft key [ERASE]. 
<2> Press horizontal soft key [CURDAT]. To delete the tool management data numbers registered 
for all pots, press horizontal soft key [ALL].
<3> Press horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 To end the edit operation, press horizontal soft key [EXIT].
Explanation
- Another method
Magazine data can be input/output also by using external I/O devices.
See Section "DATA I/O".
- Displayed data
POT : As many pots as specified in parameter No. 13222, 13227, 13232, or 13237 (settable for 
each magazine) are displayed. The starting pot number can be set for each magazine in 
parameter No. 13223, 13228, 13233, or 13238.
NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the following cases, tools cannot be set in magazines:
1. A tool management data number beyond the range from 0 to (the number of valid pairs 
in parameter No. 13220) is set.
2. Tool management data is invalid (bit 1 of tool information is 0).
3. The tool management data number to be set is already set for another pot.
TYPE NO. : Tool type numbers corresponding to tool management data numbers are displayed.
Values cannot be set on this screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SPINDLE : The tool management data numbers and tool type numbers of spindle positions are 
displayed.
WAIT : The tool management data numbers and tool type numbers of wait positions are displayed.
- Edit mode
To edit data, press horizontal soft key [EDIT] to enter tool management data edit mode.
- Tool management data number
Tool management data numbers can optionally be extended to 64, 240, or 1000 pairs. In addition, the 
number of tools used can be set in parameter No. 13220.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Display of the spindle positions and wait positions
The spindle position and wait position can be set for each path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1321 -
12.3.27.2 Displaying and setting tool management screen (15/19-inch 
display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
3 Press vertical soft key [TOOL].
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (a) Tool management data screen (15-inch display unit)
4 By using the page keys , cursor keys , and horizontal soft keys [←]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and [→], move the cursor to the position of the tool information of the tool number for which you 
want to set or modify data.
Alternatively, type the tool number of the data you want to set or modify, and press horizontal soft 
key [NO. SRH].
5 Press horizontal soft key [EDIT]. 
6 To set tool data, type a desired value, then press MDI key .
To delete tool information, follow the steps below.
<1> In step 4, move the cursor to the tool information you want to erase.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<2> Press horizontal soft key [ERASE]. 
<3> Press horizontal soft key [CURDAT]. To delete entire tool information, press horizontal soft 
key [ALL].
<4> Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
7 To end the edit operation, press horizontal soft key [EXIT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1322 -
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (15-inch display unit)
8 When horizontal soft key [CHECK] is pressed, if there are tools with the same number but with 
different count types (count and time), the cursor moves to the tool type number of the smallest tool 
management number in the tool type numbers and a warning message appears.
The warning messages issued by the check function are shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> For the same type of tools with different count types
L-COUNT TYPE MISMATCH:XXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXX= tool type number)
<2> For the same type of tools with the same count type
L-COUNT TYPE MATCH
Explanation
- Another method
Tool management data, customize data, and names set for tool states can be input/output also by using 
external I/O devices.
See Section "DATA I/O".
- Displayed information
- Life information
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (c) Tool management data life status screen(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1323 -
NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed. These numbers can be displayed but 
cannot be set. The tool management data number of edited data is kept blinking until 
tool management data edit mode ends. Tool management data numbers set or deleted 
on the magazine screen also blink on the tool management screen.
TYPE NO. : Tool type numbers are displayed.
A value from 0 to 99,999,999 can be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MG : The magazine number assigned to each tool is indicated. These numbers can be 
displayed but cannot be set.
POT : The pot number assigned to each tool is indicated. These numbers can be displayed 
but cannot be set.
T-INFO : The following five types of information are displayed sequentially from the right:
- Tool management data: Valid (R)/invalid (-))
- Life count type: Time (T)/count (C)
- Tool type: Oversize tool (B)/normal tool (N)
- Data access: Locked (L)/unlocked (U)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When a tool is not under life management:
Included in the tools to be searched (1)/not included in the tools to be searched (0)
NOTE
1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications 
defined by the machine tool builder.
2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type.
L-COUNT : The number of use times/use period of time of each tool is indicated.
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MAX-LIFE : The maximum life value of each tool is indicated.
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.
NOTICE-L : Noticed life value of a tool
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.
L-STATE : Current tool state
One of the four states, including invalid (0), present (1, 2), not present (3), and broken 
(4), is indicated. The numbers in parentheses are data values used when these states 
are input in MDI.
- Spindle speed/feedrate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Spindle speed/feedrate
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (d) Tool management data spindle speed/feedrate screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1324 -
S : Spindle speed.
A value from 0 to 99,999 can be set.
F : Feedrate.
A value from 0 to 99,999,999 can be set.
- Tool offset information
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (e) Tool management data tool offset screen (15-inch display unit)
H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
D : Cutter compensation number (for machining center systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
TG : Tool geometry compensation number (for lathe systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
TW : Tool wear compensation number (for lathe systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
The displayed offset data is determined depending on the option configuration and parameter
settings (bits 1(DCR), 2(DOY), 4(DO2), 6(DOT), and 7(DOM) of parameter No. 13202).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1325 -
- Customize information
Fig. 12.3.27.2 (f) Tool management data customize data screen (15-inch display unit)
CUSTOM0 : Bit-type customize information.
For each bit, 1 or 0 can be input.
CUSTOM1 to 4 : Customize information. Any value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
CUSTOM5 to 20 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
extension option (5 to 20) of the tool management function is enabled. Any 
value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
CUSTOM21 to 40 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data 
extension option (5 to 40) of the tool management function is enabled. Any 
value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
- Tool management data number
Tool management data numbers can optionally be extended to 64, 240, or 1000 pairs. The number of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tools used can be set in parameter No. 13220.
- Edit mode
To edit data, press horizontal soft key [EDIT] to enter tool management data edit mode.
- Life count override
When the period of time is set as the tool life count type, the life count can be overridden if bit 2 (LVF) of 
parameter No. 6801 is set to 1. Specify an override value by using a switch on the machine operator's 
panel.
Example)
When cutting is performed for 10 minutes with an override of 0.1, one minute is counted in the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
life counter.
- Tool management extension function
When tool management extension functions are enabled, you can use the following functions in addition 
to the tool management functions:
- A value with a decimal point can be set as customize data.
The maximum number of decimal places can be set to 7 by G10 data input and file input.
- Various types of tool management data can be protected using KEY signals.
An attempt to enter a value to a protected data causes a warning message “WRITE PROTECT.”


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1326 -
- Tool life count period selection
Bit 5 of tool information is used to make a life count period selection.
Item Description
Data length 1 byte (flag data)
#5 REV 0: A life count period of 1 sec is used.
1: A life count period of 8 msec is used.
Range of count is as follows.
1sec : 0 to 3,599,999 sec (999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds)
8msec : 0 to 3,599,992 ms (59 minutes 59 seconds 992 milliseconds)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.3.27.3 Each tool data screen (15/19-inch display unit)
Each tool data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
3 Press vertical soft key [EACH TOOL]. The each tool data screen appears.
Fig. 12.3.27.3 (a) Each tool data screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1327 -
Explanation
- Header
The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT.
When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same header is displayed on these
pages.
- Data table
The data table shows data items related to a tool at a time.
The data items are displayed from the upper left to the lower left, the upper right, and the lower right in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the cursor is on the left column of the data table, it moves to the right column on 
the row immediately above. When the cursor is on the first data item, it moves to the last 
data item.
Moves the cursor right on the screen.
When the cursor is on the right column of the data table, it moves to the left column on 
the row immediately below. When the cursor is on the last data item, it moves to the first 
data item.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1328 -
- Soft key operations
Horizontal soft key [EDIT]
Enters the management data edit mode.
Horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]
Displays data with a tool management data number when pressed after the tool management data 
number is entered.
Horizontal soft key [PREV.TOOL]
Returns to the previous tool management data number.
Horizontal soft key [NEXT.TOOL]
Proceeds to the next tool management number.
Horizontal soft key [F INPUT]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Horizontal soft key [F INPUT]
Inputs data related to the tool management function.
Can be used only in the standard mode.
Requires placing the NC in the EDIT mode.
Horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]
Writes data related to the tool management function.
Can be used only in the standard mode.
Requires placing the NC in the EDIT mode.
Operation in the management data edit mode
To edit data, press horizontal soft key [EDIT] to enter the management data edit mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.27.3 (b) Each tool data editing screen (15-inch display unit)
In the management data edit mode, “EDITING” is displayed at the lower right of the screen.
In the management data edit mode, the above key operations (Fig. 12.3.27.3 (b)), in addition to those 
mentioned above except [F INPUT] and [F OUTPUT], can be performed.
Actually writes a value entered using numeric keys.
Horizontal soft key [END]
Ends the management data edit mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1329 -
12.3.27.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type (15/19-inch 
display unit)
Total life data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
3 Press vertical soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears.
4 Using horizontal soft key [CHANGE] can switch total tool life data displays between specification


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by count and specification by duration.
Fig. 12.3.27.4 (a) Count display (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.27.4 (b) Time display (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1330 -
Displayed information
S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type
TYPE NO. : Tool type number
T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number
T-L-COUNT : Total of used counts/times of tools with the same tool type number
T-MAX-LIFE : Total of maximum life values of tools with the same tool type number
T-NOTICE-L : Total of notice life values of tools with the same tool type number when the tool life


key: chroma:document
string_value:
arrival signal is to be output for each tool type
STATUS : Whether the tool life arrival signal has been output when the signal is to be output for 
each tool type
Either of the two states (UNDONE and DONE) is displayed.
NUM : Number of tools with the same tool type number
When bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 and bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 1, 
the tool life arrival signal is to be output for each tool type number and T-NOTICE-L and STATUS are 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed.
Key operations
- MDI key operations
Displays the previous page. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page.
Displays the next page. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page.
Moves the cursor up on the screen.
Moves the cursor down on the screen.
Disabled.
Disabled.
- Soft key operations
Horizontal soft key [DETAIL] Displays the detailed life data screen.
Horizontal soft key [UPDATE] Updates data displayed on the total life data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Horizontal soft key [CHANGE] Switch the display between the count and time types.
Horizontal soft key [T-TYPENO. SRH] Moves the cursor to a tool type number when pressed 
after the number is entered.
Horizontal soft key [T-ASCE -SORT] Sorts data in ascending order of tool type numbers.
Horizontal soft key [T-DESC -SORT] Sorts data in descending order of tool type numbers.
Horizontal soft key [R-ASCE -SORT] Sorts data in ascending order of remaining life values.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Horizontal soft key [R-DESC -SORT] Sorts data in descending order of remaining life values.
NOTE
1 After horizontal soft key [T-ASCE -SORT], [T-DESC -SORT], [R-ASCE -SORT], 
or [R-DESC -SORT] is pressed, the cursor is positioned at the top of page 1 of 
the total life data screen.
2 When the power is turned on, data of the count counting type is displayed in 
ascending order of tool type numbers. When the display type is changed or data 
is sorted in a different order, the status is kept.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 If horizontal soft key [DETAIL] is pressed when no data is displayed on the total 
life data screen, the warning message “NO DETAILED LIFE DATA SCREEN” is 
output.
4 If an unregistered tool type is specified and horizontal soft key [T-TYPENO. 
SRH] is pressed, the warning message “UNREGISTERED NUMBER” is output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1331 -
Detailed life data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
3 Press vertical soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears.
4 Selecting horizontal soft key [DETAIL] causes the detailed life data screen to appear.
Fig. 12.3.27.4 (c) Detailed life data screen (15-inch display unit)
- Displayed information


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Displayed information
TYPE NO. : Tool type number
ORDER : Sequential number in ascending order of remaining life times or the order in which the 
customize data is set.
NO. : Tool management data number
REM-LIFE : Remaining life value obtained by subtracting the life count value from the maximum life 
value
L-COUNT : Total used count or time of the tool
MAX-LIFE : Maximum life value of the tool
NOTICE-L : Notice life value of the tool
L-STATE : Life status of the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
One of the four states (NO-MNG (0), ENABLE (1, 2), NONE (3), and DAMAGED (4)) is 
displayed.
Key operations
- MDI key operations
Displays the previous page.
Displays the next page.
Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page.
Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1332 -
Disabled.
Disabled.
- Soft key operations
Horizontal soft key [UPDATE]
Updates data displayed on the detailed life data screen.
The cursor is positioned at the beginning of page 1 after this soft key is pressed.
Horizontal soft key [CLOSE]
Closes the detailed life data screen and returns to the total life data screen.
NOTE
When horizontal soft key [CLOSE] is pressed and the total life data screen is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed again, the cursor on the total life screen data is positioned as follows.
- When the tools with the tool type number displayed when the detailed data 
screen is closed are registered as tool management data, the cursor on the 
total life screen is positioned at that tool type number.
- When the tools with the tool type number displayed when the detailed data 
screen is closed are not registered as tool management data, the cursor on


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the total life data screen is positioned at the first total life data.
12.3.27.5 Tool geometry data screen (15/19-inch display unit)
Tool geometry data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
3 Selecting vertical soft key [TOOL-GEOM] causes the tool geometry data screen to appear.
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (a) Tool geometry data screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1333 -
- Displayed item
NO. : Tool geometry number
Up to 20 numbers can be displayed.
LEFT : Sets the number of pots on the left of the reference pot that are to be occupied.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set.
RIGHT : Sets the number of pots on the right of the reference pot that are to be occupied.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set.
UPPER : Sets the number of pots above the reference pot that are to be occupied.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A value between 0 and 4 can be set. (Use this item when the magazine is of the matrix type.)
LOWER : Sets the number of pots under the reference pot that are to be occupied.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set. (Use this item when the magazine is of the matrix type.)
Key operations
- Operations in the standard mode
MDI key operations
Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value.
Moves the cursor up on the screen.
Moves the cursor down on the screen.
Moves the cursor left on the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moves the cursor right on the screen.
Soft key operations
Horizontal soft key [NO.SRH] Moves the cursor on a tool geometry number when pressed after the 
number is entered.
Horizontal soft key [EDIT] Enters the data edit mode.
Horizontal soft key [F INPUT] Inputs data related to the tool management functions.
This key is available only in the standard mode.
Put the NC in the EDIT mode.
Horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT] Outputs data related to the tool management functions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This key is available only in the standard mode.
Put the NC in the EDIT mode.
In the management data edit mode, the above key operations (Fig. 12.3.27.5 (a)), in addition to [NO.SRH] 
mentioned above, can be performed.
- Operations in the edit mode
To edit data, press horizontal soft key [EDIT] to enter the edit mode. In the edit mode, “EDITING” is 
displayed at the lower right of the screen.
MDI key operation
Actually writes a value entered using numeric keys.
Soft key operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1334 -
Example
Set the edit mode. When the tool geometry with tool geometry number 1 occupies 1 pot in the left 
direction, 0.5 pots in the right direction, and 1.5 pots in the down direction, set data as shown in the Fig. 
12.3.27.5 (b):
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (b) Example of setting data on the tool geometry data screen (15-inch display unit)
- Display of occupied pots in the magazine management table


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Each pot occupied by a tool stored in another pot is indicated with an asterisk (*).
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (c) Magazine management table (15-inch display unit)
If a tool to be registered for a magazine is determined to interfere with another tool, the warning message 
“TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR:xxxx,xxxx” is displayed. xxxx indicates the tool number of 
each of the two tools. If a tool is determined to interfere with multiple tools, only the first tool detected by


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the NC interference check is displayed.
If a tool is determined to interfere with the frame of a magazine, the tool number of the tool to be stored 
and “FRAME” are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1335 -
- Search for an empty pot for a oversize tool
During the management data editing, a horizontal soft key for searching for empty oversize tool pots is 
displayed.
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (d) Searching for an empty pot for a oversize tool (15-inch display unit)
Enter the tool geometry number in the key-in buffer and press a search horizontal soft key. The cursor 
moves to an empty pot fit for the geometry.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
EMPTY-SRCH.N : Searches for an empty pot forward.
EMPTY-SRCH.P : Searches for an empty pot backward.
EMPTY-SRCH : Searches for the pot nearest to the current position.
- Tool management screen
You can use bit 2 of tool information to switch between a oversize tool and normal tool. For a oversize 
tool, set a tool geometry number fit for the tool.
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (e) Bit for switching between a normal tool and oversize tool (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1336 -
Fig. 12.3.27.5 (f) Tool geometry number (15-inch display unit)
12.3.28 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15/19-inch 
Display Unit)
The language used for display can be switched to another language.
A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display
language on this screen, the display language can be switched without turning off then on the power.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Displaying and setting the display language
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [LANGUAGE].
3 Press vertical soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.
Fig. 12.3.28 (a) LANGUAGE screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1337 -
4 Press page key or , then press cursor key or to move the cursor to a 
desired display language.
5 Press horizontal soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the selected language. The 
language specified on this screen continues to be used if the power is turned off then back on.
Explanation
- Language switching
The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0.
- Selectable languages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
24. Indonesian
25. Slovenian
Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a 
list of switchable languages. 
Limitation
- Language parameter modification on the parameter screen
Which language to be used for display is specified with parameter No. 3281. This parameter can be 
modified using the parameter screen as well. However, if a modification is made on the parameter screen,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the new setting is not reflected until "APPLY" operation is performed on the language screen or the 
power is turned on again. If an invalid value is set in parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen, the 
screen is displayed in English after the power is turned on again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1338 -
12.3.29 Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15/19-inch Display Unit)
You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC 
and PMC data.
When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an external unit, the operation 
level is compared with the protection level to determine whether to allow the change or external output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.3.29.1 Operation level setting (15-inch display unit)
You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels.
Displaying and setting the operation level setting screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [PROTECT].
3 Press vertical soft key [PROTECT]. 
The operation level setting screen (Fig. 12.3.29.1) shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.29.1 (a) Operation level setting screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT
PASSWD].
5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press horizontal soft key [CANCEL PASSWD].
Explanation
- Operation level setting
To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal.
To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password.
Table 12.3.29.1 Operation level setting
Operation level Setting Sample grouping
7 (high) Password -


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1339 -
Operation level Setting Sample grouping
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (level 1)
2 Memory protection key signal User level (level 2)
1 Memory protection key signal User level (level 3)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (level 4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains unchanged until the password is cleared.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
NOTE
When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each 
entered character.
12.3.29.2 Password modification (15/19-inch display unit)
The current operation level is displayed.
The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified.
Displaying and setting the password modification screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [PROTECT].
3 Press vertical soft key [PROTECT]. 
4 Press vertical soft key [PASSWORD]. 
The PASSWORD CHANGE screen (Fig. 12.3.29.2 (a) ) shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.29.2 (a) PASSWORD CHANGE screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified, then press 
horizontal soft key [INPUT].
7 Key in a new password, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
8 Key in the new password again for confirmation, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1340 -
9 Press horizontal soft key [PASSWD CHANGE].
10 To clear the password, press horizontal soft key [PASSWD CLEAR].
Explanation
Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input.
NOTE
1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters 
are available:
- Uppercase alphabetic characters
- Numeric characters


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Numeric characters
2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each 
entered character.
3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is 
determined as follows:
- Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
- Password of the current operation level
Can be changed.
- Password of an operation level lower than the current operation level
Can be changed (only to the initial password).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
12.3.29.3 Protection level setting (15/19-inch display unit)
The current operation level is displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed.
Confirmation based on protection level setting
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [PROTECT].
3 Press vertical soft key [PROTECT]. 
4 Press vertical soft key [DATA LEVEL] to change the protection level of CNC data or press vertical 
soft key [PMC LEVEL] to change the protection level of PMC data.
The following protection level change screen (Fig. 12.3.29.3 (a) ) is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1341 -
Fig. 12.3.29.3 (a) Protection level change screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item. 
6 Key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
NOTE
When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to 
switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC.
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Output protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit.
As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high).
Table 12.3.29.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data
Type of data Initial protection level
Change Output
Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO>
(including variable data dedicated to the macro executor)
0 0
Periodical maintenance data <PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DATA> 0 0
Tool management data <"TOOL LIFE TIME DATA> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Tool offset data <TOOL OFFSET DATA>
(For each type when tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are 
treated differently)
0 0
Clock data <TIME> 0 0
Workpiece origin shift amount data <WORK ZERO SHIFT> 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data <WORK ZERO OFFSET> 0 0
Ethernet setting data <ETHER NET SETTING> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1342 -
Type of data Initial protection level
Change Output
Parameter data <PARAMETER DATA> 4 0
Settings <SETTING DATA> 0 0
Parameter data for Power Mate CNC manager function
<PARAMETER DATA FOR POWER MATE CNC MANAGER> 0 0
Each part program <PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Part program editing operation <CHANGE PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 12.3.29.3 (b) Protection level of PMC data
Type of data Initial protection level
Change Output
Composition parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (each path) 0 0
Sequence program 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
I/O configuration 0 0
I/O Link group selection 0 0
Registration of I/O device 0 0
NOTE
1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the 
protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current 
operation level.
4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option 
configuration.
5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming 
Manual (B-64513EN)”.
6 Data related to tool information on the EACH TOOL DATA screen for the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
management function is protected by protecting tool offset data.
7 The type of tool offset data put in effect varies depending on the tool 
compensation value memory used.
8 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM 
FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL screen.
9 Part program editing includes program editing for the MDI mode.
10 Presetting absolute coordinates causes preset workpiece coordinate system 
values to be protected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
values to be protected. 
11 During tool offset data input/output, if any tool offset data type is not allowed to 
be changed or output to the outside, it is processed as follows:
- Input : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is 
changed.
- Output : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1343 -
12.3.29.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection 
level of a program (15/19-inch display unit)
The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the program folder screen.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program can be changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [FOLDER]. 
Fig. 12.3.29.4 (a) Program directory screen (15-inch display unit)
3 Press horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to switch to detail displays.
4 Move the cursor to a desired program.
5 Press the continuous menu key to display horizontal soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
6 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE ATTR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key [CHANGE LEVEL].
8 To change the output protection level, key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key
[OUT LEVEL].
Explanation
The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as "CHANGE 
PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL".
NOTE
1 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the 
protection level cannot be changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current 
operation level.
3 A protection level can be set only for those part programs that are held on the 
"CNC_MEM" device.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1344 -
12.3.30 Precision Level Selection (15/19-inch Display Unit)
An intermediate precision level between the parameters for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and 
the parameters for emphasis on precision (precision level 10) set on the machining parameter tuning 
screen (AI contour) can be selected. As shown in the Fig. 12.3.30 (a), the levels are proportionally linear,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and an intermediate level can be selected so that optimal parameters can be automatically calculated to 
perform machining.
Value
RMS value
 1 10 Precision level
(RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value)
Fig. 12.3.30 (a) Image of "level"
Procedure for precision level selection
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [PRECI LEVEL].
4 Press vertical soft key [PRECI LEVEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.30 (b) Precision level selection screen
5 To change the precision level, key in a desired precision level (1 to 10), then press MDI key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1345 -
6 When the precision level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the velocity-emphasized 
parameter set and precision-emphasized parameter set for parameter modification.
For the modified parameters, see the description of the machining parameter tuning.
7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several 
times to display the screen for the axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.3.31 Machining Level Selection (15/19-inch Display Unit)
12.3.31.1 Smoothing level selection
An intermediate smoothing level between the parameters for smoothing level 1 and the parameters for 
smoothing level 10 set on the machining parameter tuning screen (smoothing) can be selected. As shown 
in the Fig. 12.3.31.1 (a), the levels are proportionally linear, and an intermediate level can be selected so 
that optimal parameters can be automatically calculated to perform machining.
Value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Value
1 10 Smoothing level
RMS value
Fig. 12.3.31.1 (a) Image of “level”
Procedure for smoothing level selection
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [MACHIN LEVEL].
4 Press vertical soft key [MACHIN LEVEL] to display vertical soft key [SMOOTH LEVEL].
Fig. 12.3.31.1 (b) Smoothing level selection screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1346 -
5 To change the smoothing level, key in a desired smoothing level (1 to 10), then press MDI key 
.
6 When the smoothing level is changed, a RMS value is obtained from the smoothing level 1 
parameter set and smoothing level 10 parameter set for parameter modification.
For the modified parameters, see the description of the machining parameter tuning.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 If there is an axis in addition to the currently displayed axes, press page key or several 
times to display the screen for the axis.
12.3.31.2 Precision level selection
For details of precision level selection, See Subsection, “Precision Level Selection (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1347 -
12.3.32 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be 
grasped. Also on the screen, tool life management data can be edited. The screen is either:
- Tool life management (list screen) or
- Tool life management (group editing screen)
Overview
EDIT
END
M


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview
EDIT
END
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1), the following 
parameters can be used to display arbitrary groups and remaining set values.
- If bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1
An arbitrary group is displayed on the list and group editing screens.
- If bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 = 1
Remaining set values are displayed on the group editing screen. The group editing screen always 
displays H and D codes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displays H and D codes.
Group editing screen 
Tool life management (group editing screen)
Displayed items:
- NEXT GROUP - USING GROUP
- SELECTED GROUP - GROUP NO.
- MAX.TOOL PIECES - COUNT TYPE
- LIFE - LIFE COUNT
- T-CODE
- TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS
- H-CODE and D-CODE
- TOOL NO.
Functions:
- Setting tool data - Deleting group data
- Setting a tool status - Deleting tool data
- Selecting tool skip - Searching for groups
- Setting a life count type, life value, and tool life
 counter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
counter
Tool life management (list screen)
Displayed items:
- NEXT GROUP - USING GROUP
- SELECTED GROUP - COUNT OVERRIDE
- GROUP NO. - COUNT TYPE
- LIFE - LIFE COUNT
- TOOL MANAGEMENT STATUS
- REGISTERED TOOL NUMBER
- GROUP TO BE CHANGE
Functions:
- Searching for groups
- Clearing execution data
- Setting the tool life counter
List screen 
Pressing horizontal soft key [EDIT] or [END] 
switches from the list screen to the group editing 
screen or vice versa.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1348 -
T
The T series is provided with two tool change types, turret type and ATC type. For the T series, displays 
vary depending on which tool change type is in use.
If the turret type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0)
- Neither the H code nor the D code is used; neither is displayed.
- No arbitrary group can be used; no arbitrary group is displayed.
If the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The D code is displayed on the group editing screen.
- If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1) and bit 5 
(TGN) of parameter No. 6802 = 1, arbitrary groups are displayed on the list and group editing 
screens.
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No.6805 = 1) and bit 3 (GRP) 
or parameter No. 6802 = 1, remaining set values are displayed on the group editing screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.3.32.1 Tool life management (list screen) (15/19-inch display unit)
This screen can display the life management status of all tools in tool groups and whether the life of the 
tool groups has expired. It also enables you to set tool life counters and clear execution data.
Displays on the list screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [TOOL LIFE].
3 Press vertical soft key [TOOL LIFE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.32.1 (a) Displaying tool life management (list screen) (15-inch display unit)
(A)
(B)
(C)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1349 -
- Contents of (A)
(A) displays tool group numbers and an override value. If there is no tool group to display, ****, instead 
of tool group numbers, is displayed.
NEXT GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is started by the next M06 command.
USING GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way.
SELECTED GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This way, the information about the last tool in the FOCAS2 or PMC window 
indicates that the life of the tool has expired if the tool change signal TLCH is 
“1”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1350 -
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, an arbitrary group number is displayed in the parentheses beside 
the tool group number. If no arbitrary group number is specified, “********” is displayed instead.
Fig. 12.3.32.1 (b) Displaying arbitrary group numbers
Arbitrary group numbers are enabled by setting the following parameters.
M
- The tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 = 1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1351 -
Procedure
- Setting the tool life counter
The tool life counter can be set with a value, using the following methods.
Method 1
1 Place the cursor on the tool life counter for a desired tool group.
2 Enter the value from the keypad.
3 Press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
Method 2
1 Place the cursor on the tool life counter for a desired tool group.
2 Enter the value from the keypad.
3 Press key.
- Clearing execution data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Clearing execution data
All existing execution data for a tool group selected by the cursor can be cleared as follows:
1 Place the cursor on the tool group whose execution data you want to clear.
2 Press horizontal soft key [ERASE]. 
3 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
NOTE
Setting bit 4 (GRS) of parameter No. 6800 to 1 enables execution data for all 
registered tool groups to be cleared.
- Selecting tool groups
Tool groups can be selected using the following methods.
Method 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1352 -
12.3.32.2 Tool life management (group editing screen) (15/19-inch 
display unit)
On this screen, it is possible to edit tool life management data (such as tool life value, tool life counter, 
and tool data) for the tool group of interest.
Displaying the group editing screen
Procedure
1. Place the cursor on the tool group you want to edit from the list screen.
2. Press horizontal soft key [EDIT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.32.2 (a) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (15-inch display unit)
NOTE
If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and 
a tool life counter value is displayed for the tool group.
- Contents of (A)
Like the counterpart of the list screen, (A) of the editing screen displays the next tool group number and 
override value. If there is no appropriate tool group, **** is displayed instead.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NEXT GROUP : Tool group for which life counting is started by the next M06 command.
USING GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way.
SELECTED GROUP : Tool group number for which life counting is currently under way or life 
counting has been performed most recently.
COUNT OVERRIDE : “1.0TIMES” is displayed if the tool life counter override signal is disabled (bit 
2 (LFV) of parameter No. 6801 is 0).
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1353 -
- Contents of (B) 
(B) details tool life management data related to a selected tool group as follows:
TYPE : 1 Specification by count
2 Specification by duration
LIFE : Tool life value
COUNT : Tool life counter
STATE : Tool status Tool in use Tool not in use
Life remaining @ No indication
Skip # #
Life expired * *
T-CODE : Tool number
M
H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code
T
H-CODE : No display.
D-CODE : Tool offset value specification code 
if ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 1)
NOTE
1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @.
2 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 is 0, a tool number remains prefixed with @
even if the life of the tool has expired until another tool is selected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 If bit 3 (EMD) of parameter No. 6801 is 1, the following differences can occur 
depending on the type of the life counter in use.
- If the life counter type is specification by duration, the prefix is changed to “*” 
(life expired) as soon as the tool life expires.
- If the life counter type is specification by count, the counter is incremented by 
one at the end of a program (such as M02 or M30). So, the prefix is not


key: chroma:document
string_value:
changed to “*” (life expired) even if the tool life counter matches the life value. 
The symbol “*” (life expired) appears when the tool life count is incremented 
after the CNC is reset.
4 If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is 1, the symbol “*” indicating the expiration 
of the life of the last tool appears on the tool life management screen when the 
life counter for the last tool of the tool group of interest matches the life value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This way, the information about the last tool in the FOCAS2 or PMC window 
indicates that the life of the tool has expired if the tool change signal TLCH is 
“1”.
Displaying arbitrary groups and remaining set values
Fig. 12.3.32.2 (b) Displaying arbitrary group numbers and remaining set values on the editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1354 -
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is 1) and the 
following parameters are enabled, arbitrary groups and remaining set values are displayed.
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 is 1)
REST COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 is 1)
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6802 is 1)
T
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is 1)
Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is 0)
OPTION GROUP : No display.
REST COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 is 1)
ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is 1)
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 is 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
REST COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 is 1)
Setting data on the group editing screen
Tool life management data can be specified in the reset state (both the OP and RST signals are “0”). 
However, setting bit 1 (TCI) of parameter No. 6804 to 1 enables tool life management data to be specified 
even during automatic operation (the OP signal is “1”).
The available editing operations are listed below.
M
Items that can be edited Mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, the D code can be edited only if the ATC type is in use (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 
5040 is 1).
All modes
Adding tool numbers (T code) MDI
Deleting all tool group data at a time MDI
Deleting tool data (status, T code, and D code) MDI
Selecting tool skip MDI
Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set) MDI
If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a tool life value, and a tool life counter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1355 -
NOTE
1 As for USING GROUP or NEXT GROUP editing:
<1> During automatic operation (OP signal is “1” and bit 1 (TCI) of parameter 
No. 6804 is 1), only the tool life counter can be changed.
<2> In the reset state (OP signal is “0” and RST signal is “0”), the following 
editing operation stops life management because it cannot be continued.
- Adding tool numbers (T code)
- Deleting all tool group data at a time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the tool group of interest.
- Selecting tool clear.
Procedure
-Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group 
number, and remaining set value
Setting a life count type, tool life value, tool life counter, tool data, arbitrary group number, and 
remaining set value
Method 1
1 Place the cursor on the desired item.
2 Enter a value from the keypad.
3 Press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. 
Method 2
1 Place the cursor on the desired item.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Enter a value from the keypad.
3 Press .
NOTE
1 Changing a tool life value or tool life counter does not affect the tool status or tool 
change signal.
2 Changing a life count type causes the tool life value and too life counter to be 
reset to 0.
M
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is 1) and the 
following parameters are enabled, arbitrary groups and remaining set values can be specified


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group number (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 is 1)
REST COUNT :Remaining set value used until a new tool is selected (if bit 3 (GRP) of parameter No. 
6802 is 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1356 -
T
If the tool life management B function is enabled (bit 4 (LFB) of parameter No. 6805 is 1)
Turret type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is 0)
OPTION GROUP : Cannot be set.
REST COUNT : It is possible to set a remaining set value to be used until a new tool is selected (if bit 
3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is 1).
ATC type (bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 is 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPTION GROUP : Arbitrary group numbers can be set (if bit 5 (TGN) of parameter No. 6802 is 1).
REST COUNT : It is possible to set a remaining set value to be used until a new tool is selected (if bit 
3 (GRP) of parameter No. 6802 is 1).
- Adding tool numbers
Tool numbers can be added to a tool group as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) just before a tool number to be added.
3 Enter the tool number from the key pad.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press horizontal soft key [INSERT]. 
(Example)
Adding tool number 1550 between numbers 1 and 2 (for the M series)
1 Move the cursor to the data for number 1, enter “1550”, and press [INSERT].
2 The entered T code 1550 is inserted in the position of number 2. The H and D codes are reset to 
0.
- Deleting all tool group data at a time
All tool group data can be deleted at a time as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Select the tool group from which you want to delete all tool data at a time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press horizontal soft key [DELETE]. 
4 Press horizontal soft key [GROUP]. 
5 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
- Deleting tool data
Tool data can be deleted from a tool group as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) you want to delete.
3 Press horizontal soft key [DELETE]. 
4 Press horizontal soft key [<CURS>]. 
NOTE
1 Deleting all tools from a tool group is equivalent to deleting the tool group itself.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Deleting a tool indicated with @ (in use) results in @ being moved to the previous 
tool whose life has expired or which has been skipped.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1357 -
- Selecting tool skip
Tool data can be placed in a skip state as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) for a tool you want to skip.
3 Press horizontal soft key [STATE]. 
4 Press horizontal soft key [SKIP]. 
- Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set)
Tool data state can be cleared as follows:
1 Select the MDI mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Place the cursor on the tool data (T code, H code, or D code) for a tool you want to clear.
3 Press horizontal soft key [STATE]. 
4 Press horizontal soft key [CLEAR]. 
- Selecting a tool group
A tool group can be selected as follows:
Method 1
1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad.
2 Press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH]. 
NOTE
If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for


key: chroma:document
string_value:
an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number.
Method 2
1 Press page key or to display the target tool group.
- Switching to the list screen
The tool life management (list screen) can be resumed as follows:
1 Press horizontal soft key [END].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1358 -
12.3.33 Displaying and Setting Pattern Data Inputs
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Described below are a method for displaying machining menus (pattern menus) created by machine tool 
builders and a method for setting them. The descriptions are based on an example. For actual pattern 
menus and pattern data, refer to manuals released by respective machine tool builders.
Displaying pattern data and pattern menus


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Given below is a procedure for displaying pattern menus.
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times.
3 Press vertical soft key [PATTERN MENU]. 
The pattern menu screen (Fig. 12.3.33 (a)) shown below appears.
Fig. 12.3.33 (a) Pattern menu screen (15-inch display unit) 
On this screen, a pattern to be used can be selected.
The following two methods can be used to select patterns.
- Using the cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Using the cursor
1 Move the cursor to a pattern name you want to select, using cursor key or , and 
then press soft key [SELECT] or .
- Specifying a pattern number
1 Enter a number displayed at the left side of a pattern name, and press soft key [SELECT] or 
.
The custom macro screen (pattern data screen) (Fig. 12.3.33 (b)) shown below appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1359 -
Fig. 12.3.33 (b) Custom macro screen (pattern data) (15-inch display unit) 
2 Enter the necessary pattern data, and press .
3 After entering all necessary data, select the MEM mode and press the cycle start button. 
Machining begins.
Explanation
- Explanations about the pattern menu screen
HOLE PATTERN
An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a menu title.
BOLT HOLE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BOLT HOLE
An arbitrary character string consisting of 10 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern name.
Machine tool builders should program menu title and pattern name character strings, using custom 
macros, and save them in program memory.
- Explanations about the custom macro screen (pattern data screen)
BOLT HOLE
An arbitrary character string consisting of 12 or less characters can be displayed as a pattern data 
title.
TOOL.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
title.
TOOL.
An arbitrary character string consisting of 10 or less characters can be displayed as a variable name.
*BOLT HOLE CIRCLE*
The comment text consists of nine 12-character blocks, or the comment can be up to 12 lines 
(10.4-inch display unit) with one block counted as one line.
Machine tool builders should program variable name and comment text character strings, using 
custom macros, and save them in program memory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1360 -
12.3.34 Setting and Displaying Data When the Tool Offset for Milling 
and Turning Function Is Enabled (15/19-inch Display Unit)
T
Setting and displaying tool offset values (15/19-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
In multi-path control, select the path for which to set tool offset values, using the path selection 
switch in advance.
2 Press chapter selection vertical soft key [OFFSET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool offset screen appears.
Fig. 12.3.34 (a) Tool offset screen (15-inch display unit)
X : Set the X-axis tool offset value.
Z/LENGTH : Set the Z-axis tool offset value or tool length compensation value.
Y : Set the Y-axis tool offset value.
NOSE R/RAD : Set the tool nose radius compensation value or tool radius compensation value.
T : Set the virtual tool nose direction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press page and cursor keys to move the cursor to the offset value you want to set or change.
Alternatively, enter the number of the offset value you want to set or change and press horizontal 
soft key [NO.SRH].
4 To set the offset value, enter the value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
To change the offset value, enter a value to be incremented to or decremented from the current 
setting and press horizontal soft key [+INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1361 -
Explanation
- Decimal point programming
The offset value can be entered with a decimal point.
- Another setting method
The tool offset value can be input/output also by using external I/O devices.
See Chapter, “DATA I/O”.
The tool offset value can also be set by using the direct input of offset value measured B, tool offset value 
counter input, and other functions.
- Number of tool offsets


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Number of tool offsets
128 tool offsets are available as standard.
In a multi-path system, one of the above numbers of tool offsets can be selected for each path.
- Disabling offset value input
By setting bits 0 (WOF) and 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290, the input of tool wear compensation values 
and tool geometry compensation values is disabled.
The input of the tool offset values in any specified range from the MDI can be disabled by setting the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number of the first target tool offset value in parameter No. 3294 and the number of target tool offset 
values starting from the first value in parameter No. 3295.
If offset values are entered continuously, they are handled as follows:
1) If an offset value that can be input is input, then an offset value that cannot be input is input, a 
warning is output, but the offset value in the input enable range is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2) If an offset value that cannot be input is input, then an offset value that can be input is input, a 
warning is output, and the offset values are not set.
12.3.35 Eco Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Select a desired Eco level before starting machining, after comparing data of power consumption and 
cycletime for each Eco level.
Displaying Eco setting screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [ECO].
3 Press vertical soft key [ECO].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1362 -
Fig. 12.3.35 (a) Eco setting screen
Explanation
- Display for select an Eco level
Fig. 12.3.35 (b) Display for select an Eco level
Select an Eco level here.
The selected Eco level for the current path is also displayed.
Items Contents
Current Eco level The selected Eco level is displayed.
Level Available Eco levels are displayed.
Level 0 means normal machining.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Highlight a desired Eco level and press operation menu soft key [SELECT], and the selected 
Eco level is changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1363 -
Items Contents
Torque override Torque overrides for each level are displayed.
Torque overrides for spindle speed control mode, spindle synchronization control mode and 
rigid tapping mode are displayed. Since only one mode can be displayed at a time, pressing 
soft keys [SPNDL SPEED][SPNDL SYNC][RIGID TAP] changes displayed mode. In case of 
parameter SYC(No.8133#4)=0, torque overrides of spindle synchronization control mode are


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not displayed. And in case of parameter NRG(No.8135#3)=1, torque overrides of rigid tapping
mode are not displayed.
If multiple spindles belong to the current path, pressing MDI keys change 
spindles, whose torque overrides are displayed.
NOTE
When an invalid value (out of 0–100%) is specified in the parameter No.11397,
11398 or 5260, torque overrides are displayed as “100” in red, excluding the 
torque override for Eco level 0.
- Graphic display for data
Fig. 12.3.35 (c) Graph for eco setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Data of each Eco level are displayed in power consumption vs. cycletime.
Data of the current path are displayed.
- “Light blue” point shows data of the selected Eco level.
- “Yellow” point shows data of the highlighted Eco level.
- “Pink” points show data of available Eco levels.
NOTE
Nothing is displayed without data of Eco level 0.
- Detailed data comparison
Fig. 12.3.35 (d) Comparison of data for eco setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Detailed data of power consumption and cycletime of each Eco level can be compared here in order to 
select a desired Eco level.
Data of the current path are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1364 -
Items Contents
Level Eco levels are displayed.
Reduction Reductions in power consumption per cycle are displayed.
Reductions are calculated by using power consumption at normal machining (Eco 
level 0) as the base.
Power consumptions per cycle 
(spindle/servo/others)
Total power consumptions per cycle are displayed.
Power consumptions in spindles, servos and others (peripheral devices) are also 
displayed separately.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed separately.
Cycletime Cycletimes are displayed.
NOTE
1 Power consumption data obtained by actual machining is displayed. Therefore, 0 
is displayed at the first machining or soon after deleting data. Though these data
depends on parameter settings, machining circumstances and so on, soon after 
changing settings, data obtained before the change is displayed.
2 Here, a “cycle” means one automatic operation.
Operation on Eco setting screen
Procedure
- Select of an Eco level


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Select of an Eco level
Select a desired Eco level with comparing among data of power consumption and cycletime at each Eco 
level.
1 Select MDI mode.
2 Highlight a desired Eco level.
3 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT].
The selected Eco level is displayed in “CURRENT ECO LEVEL” and the select is completed.
NOTE
Select an Eco level for each path when the select is available for each path (bit 1 
(EEP) of the parameter No.24303 is set to 1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Deleting data of power consumption and cycletime at each Eco level
Disused data of power consumption and cycletime can be deleted individually or in a batch.
Both individual and batch deletes are effective only on data of the current path.
1 Highlight an Eco level whose data is going to be deleted.
Batch delete does not require this operation.
2 Press horizontal soft key [DELETE] or [DELETE ALL] on operation menu.
If [DELETE] is pressed, individual data is deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If [DELETE ALL] is pressed, all data of the current path are deleted.
Select menu [EXEC]/[CANCEL] is displayed.
3 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
Data is deleted.
- Switching displayed unit of power consumption
Displayed unit of power consumption can be switched to “kWh” or “Wh”.
Soft key [kWh/Wh] switches the unit to “kWh” or “Wh”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1365 -
- Switching spindle mode whose torque overrides are displayed
The spindle mode whose torque overrides are displayed can be switched by soft keys [SPNDL SPEED],
[SPNDL SYNC] and [RIGID TAP].
In case of parameter SYC(No.8133#4)=0, torque overrides of spindle synchronization control mode are 
not displayed. And in case of parameter NRG(No.8135#3)=1, torque overrides of rigid tapping mode are 
not displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not displayed.
- Switching spindle whose torque overrides are displayed
When multiple spindles belong to the current path, MDI keys can switch the spindle whose 
torque overrides are displayed.
- Change of torque overrides
Torque override for Eco level 3 can be changed.
1 Set bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 to 1.
2 Highlight the torque override for Eco level 3.
3 Select MDI mode or enter state emergency stop for all paths.
4 Release spindle synchronization mode for all paths.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Input value by MDI keys.
Available values are integers from 1 to 100.
6 Press soft key [INPUT] or MDI key .
Torque overrides for each Eco level are changed.
CAUTION
Machine or work can be damaged by out-of-synchronization when torque 
overrides of spindles in synchronization control mode differ from each other. This 
is because this function differs the time constant for acceleration/deceleration in 
spindle synchronization mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
spindle synchronization mode.
Set a common torque override for spindles belonging to the same group of 
synchronization.
NOTE
1 Use this operation only for deciding the point of the least power consumption.
Please refer to “Energy Saving Level Selecting Function “ of CONNECTION 
MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64693EN-1) for details.
2 When select of an Eco level is available for each path (bit 1 (EEP) of the 
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), operations 3 and 4 are needed only for the 
current path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
current path.
3 When bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 is set to 1, the torque override 
cannot be highlighted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1366 -
12.3.36 Eco Monitoring Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Power consumption of machine can be observed comprehensively, such as effects of eco-machining and 
time transition of power consumption.
Displaying Eco monitoring screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [ECO].
3 Press vertical soft key [ECO].
4 Press vertical soft key [ECO MONIT].
Fig. 12.3.36 (a) Eco monitoring screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Display of total power consumption
Total power consumption of a machine is displayed, which has been accumulated since the last clear 
operation of total power consumption. This is not cleared even if power is off.
Items Contents
Consumption Accumulated power consumption of a whole machine is displayed.
Reduction Difference between power consumption of normal machining and that of eco-machining is 
accumulated. The accumulated data of all paths are added. See “Example” below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CO2 equivalent Carbon-dioxide emission equivalent to “Reduction” is displayed.
NOTE
The conversion factor for CO2 equivalent is specified by the parameter No.11399.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1367 -
- Power consumption per cycle (spindle/servo/others)
Power consumption per cycle at the current Eco level is displayed in bar graphs, compared with that of 
normal machining (Eco level 0).
Items Contents
Current The power consumption of a running cycle is displayed and updated in real time.
When nothing is operated, the power consumption of the last cycle is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
summed data of all paths.
- History of power consumption
Time transition of power consumption is displayed in bar graphs, with power consumption categorized 
into that in spindles, servos and others.
Items Contents
History of power consumption Unit selected on operation menu decides displayed values as follows
Units Displayed values()
MINUTE Power consumption for a minute is displayed in a bar graph.
Up to 30 minutes’ power consumption can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1368 -
NOTE
1 Power consumption data obtained by actual machining are displayed. Therefore, 
0 is displayed at the first machining or soon after deleting data. Though these 
data depend on parameter settings, machining circumstances and so on, soon 
after changing settings, data obtained before the change are displayed.
2 Difference between power consumption of normal machining and that of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1369 -
Operation on Eco setting screen
Procedure
- Switching displayed time unit of history of power consumption
Displayed time unit of history of power consumption can be switched into every minute, every 30 
minutes, every hour and every day.
Press one of horizontal soft keys [MINUTE], [30MIN], [HOUR] and [DAY].
Displayed time unit changes.
- Turning on/off of eco-machining


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Eco-machining and normal machining can be switched by soft key [ECO OFF]/[ECO ON].
Given that Eco level 3 is selected, for example,
- Normal machining is selected by pressing soft key [ECO OFF]. Here, the selected Eco level does not 
change (Eco level 3 is kept).
- After the operation above, eco-machining of Eco level 3 is selected by pressing soft key [ECO ON].
1 Select MDI mode for all paths.
2 Release spindle synchronization mode for all paths.
3 Press horizontal soft key [ECO OFF]/[ECO ON].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In case of turning off eco-machining, Eco indicator “ECOX” in Warning area is turned off. Note that 
the current Eco level displayed on Eco setting screen does not change because the selected Eco level 
does not change in this operation.
In case of turning on eco-machining, Eco indicator “ECOX” in Warning area is turned on. Note that 
nothing is displayed when Eco level 0 is selected.
NOTE
When select of an Eco level is available for each path (bit 1 (EEP) of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), operations 1 and 2 are needed only for the 
current path.
- Switching displayed unit of power consumption
Displayed unit of power consumption can be switched to “kWh” or “Wh”.
Soft key [kWh/Wh] switches the unit to “kWh” or “Wh”.
- Clearing total power consumption
Displayed total power consumption can be set to 0 and new accumulation is started.
1 Press horizontal soft key [TOTAL CLEAR].
Select menu [EXEC]/[CANCEL] is displayed.
2 Press soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press soft key [EXEC].
Displayed total power consumptions are set to 0 and “start time” is set to current time
- Switching displayed data in “Power consumption per cycle”
With multiple paths, displayed data in “Power consumption per cycle” can be switched into data of each 
path or summed data of all paths.
Soft key [EACH PATH]/[ALL PATH] can switch the data.
Press horizontal soft key [EACH PATH]/[ALL PATH].
Data in “Power consumption per cycle” is changed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1370 -
Restriction
Since this function uses clock, change in clock causes following results.
Note that change in clock requires power off.
- Total power consumption
“From start” changes according to change in clock, though “Consumption”, “Reduction”, “CO2 
equivalent” and “Start time” does not change.
- History of power consumption
If clock changes backward, history of power consumption is entirely set to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If clock changes forward, obtained power consumption and time do not change, though power 
consumption of jumped period is set to 0. If clock is advanced by an hour, for example, power 
consumption of the jumped hour is considered as 0.
12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and 
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI unit. Parameters can also be set with external 
input/output devices such as the memory card (see Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”).
In addition, pitch error compensation data used for improving the precision in positioning with the ball 
screw on the machine can be set or displayed by the operations under function key .
See Chapter, “ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS” for the diagnosis screens displayed by 
pressing function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressing function key .
Screens of an 8.4/10.4-inch display unit
12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and 
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of 
parameters depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1371 -
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters
Procedure
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling 
parameter writing described below.
2 Press function key .
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
Fig. 12.4.1 (a) PARAMETER screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, and , and cursor 
keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT]. The 
parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1372 -
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
2 Press function key .
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and
press soft key [(OPRT)] , then press [OFF:0].
7 Press the key to release the alarm condition.
When an alarm PW0000 occurred, however, it is not released unless the power is turned off and 
back on.
Explanation
- Setting parameters with external input/output devices
See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as 
the memory card.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the memory card.
- Parameters that require turning off the power
Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on again after they are set. Setting 
such parameters causes alarm PW0000. In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
- Parameter list
Refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64700EN) for the parameter list.
- Setting data
Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list indicates "Setting entry is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
acceptable". Setting 1 for PARAMETER WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the 
setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1373 -
12.4.2 Servo Parameters
This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time 
of field tuning of the machine tool.
Procedure for servo parameter setting
Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
3 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SERVO PARAM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press soft key [SERVO PARAM] to select the servo parameter screen.
The following screen (Fig. 12.4.2) appears:
Fig. 12.4.2 (a) Servo parameter setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1374 -
12.4.3 Servo Tuning
Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set.
Procedure for servo tuning
Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
3 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SERVO PARAM].
4 Press soft key [SERVO TUNE] to select the servo tuning screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Use the cursor and page keys to enter necessary data for initial setting. The following screen (Fig. 
12.4.3) appears:
Fig. 12.4.3 (a) Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
6 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
7 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1375 -
12.4.4 Spindle Setting
Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be 
displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are provided.
Setting spindle parameters
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SPINDL SETING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [SPINDL SETING] to select the spindle setting screen.
4 The following screen (Fig. 12.4.4) appears:
Fig. 12.4.4 (a) Spindle setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
5 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1376 -
12.4.5 Spindle Tuning
Spindle tuning data is displayed and set.
Setting for spindle tuning
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SPINDL SETING].
3 Press soft key [SPINDL TUNE] to select the spindle tune screen.
4 The following screen (Fig. 12.4.5 (a) ) appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.5 (a) Spindle tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1377 -
12.4.6 Spindle Monitor
Spindle-related data is displayed.
Displaying the spindle monitor
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SPINDL SETING].
3 Press soft key [SP.MON] to select the spindle monitor screen.
4 The following screen (Fig. 12.4.6) appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1378 -
12.4.7 Color Setting Screen
Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen.
Displaying the color setting screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR].
3 Press soft key [COLOR] to display the color setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.7 (a) Color setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure for operating the color setting screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Modifying the color (color palette values)
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The soft key display changes to the following operation soft keys:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified.
The current color palette value set for each primary color is displayed.
3 Select a primary color whose setting is to be modified, with the corresponding operation soft key
[RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
More than one primary color can be selected at the same time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Each time operation soft key [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] is pressed, the operation soft key toggles 
between selection and deselection.
(When operation soft keys [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] are not displayed, press the rightmost soft 
key to display the operation soft keys.)
4 Select operation soft key [BRIGHT] or [DARK] to modify the brightness of the selected prime 
color(s).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1379 -
- Storing the color (color palette values)
The set color palette values can be stored.
1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the 
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595
COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to 10435


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COLOR3 Parameters Nos. 10461 to 10475
2 Press operation soft key [MEMORY]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] stores the current color palette settings in the selected area.
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not store the current color palette
settings in the selected area.
- Calling the color (color palette values)
1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color


key: chroma:document
string_value:
palette values are stored.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the 
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
2 Press operation soft key [RECALL]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] calls the color palette values from the selected area to enable the 
color to be modified. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are stored.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not call the color palette values from the 
selected area.
NOTE
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, the settings of COLOR1 (parameters) 
are used for display. If nothing is stored for COLOR1, the default colors are used 
for display.
2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When 
modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the 
color setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1380 -
12.4.8 Machining Parameter Tuning
12.4.8.1 Machining parameter tuning (AI contour)
In AI contour control, by setting a velocity-emphasized parameter set and precision-emphasized 
parameter set of machining condition selection function and setting the precision level matching a 
machining condition such as rough machining or finish machining on the precision level setting screen or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by programming, the parameters suitable for the condition can be automatically calculated to perform 
machining.
On this screen, the parameter sets for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and emphasis on precision 
(precision level 10) can be set.
Set the following parameters:
- Acceleration rate of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
- Acceleration change time (bell-shaped)
- Allowable acceleration rate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Allowable acceleration rate
- Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
- Corner speed difference
- Maximum feedrate
- Items that can be set freely (2 items)
M
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change 
under jerk control
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in acceleration change under jerk control in 
successive linear interpolation operations


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in look-ahead smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
For details of each parameter, see the descriptions of AI contour control and jerk control (M system).
By setting bit 0 (MPR) of parameter No. 13601 to 1, this screen can be hidden.
For the method of setting a precision level, see the description of the precision level selection screen in 
Subsection 12.3.12, “Precision Level Selection”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1381 -
Procedure for machining parameter tuning
Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press soft key [MCHN TUNING] to display the machining parameter tuning screen.
Fig. 12.4.8.1 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (AI contour) (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.4.8.1 (b) Machining parameter tuning screen (AI contour) (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the 
cursor to the parameter.
5 Key in desired data then press the key on the MDI unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1382 -
6 When data is input, a RMS value is found according to the precision level parameters. (The 
precision level can be changed on the precision level selection screen or parameter setting screen.) If 
a RMS value calculation fails, a warning (indicating that automatic setting failed) is displayed.
7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining parameters are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 In addition to the setting method described above, a parameter setting method using soft keys is 
available. Pressing soft key [INIT] displays the standard value (recommended by FANUC) of the 
item selected by the cursor in the key input buffer. Pressing soft key [EXEC] initializes the item to 
the standard value. Pressing soft key [GROUP INIT] initializes all items of a group (emphasis on 
velocity or emphasis on precision) selected by the cursor to the standard values.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The Table 12.4.8.1 (a) indicates the initial settings.
Table 12.4.8.1 (a) Initial settings
Setting item
AI contour control
Unit Emphasis
on velocity
(LV1)
Emphasis on 
precision
(LV10)
Acceleration rate of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before 
interpolation <ACC FOR BIPL> 4902.000 1042.000 mm/sec2
Acceleration change time (bell-shaped) <ACC CHG TIME(BELL)> 32 64 msec
Allowable acceleration change value <JERK ACC DIFF> 0 0 mm/sec2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Allowable acceleration change value in successive linear interpolation
operations <JERK ACC DIFF(LIN)> 0 0 mm/sec2
Ratio of the change time of the jerk control <JERK ACC RATIO> 0 0 %
Allowable acceleration rate <MAX AACELERATION> 2977.000 596.000 mm/sec2
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
<T-CON AIPL ACC/DEC> 24 24 msec
Corner speed difference <CORNER FEED DIFFER> 1000 400 mm/min
Maximum cutting speed <MAX CUT FEEDRATE> 10000 10000 mm/min
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Set an acceleration rate for a linear portion in look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13610 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13611 (precision-emphasized parameter)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1660: Maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in look-ahead 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
- Acceleration change time (bell-shaped)
Set a time constant for a bell-shaped portion in acceleration/ deceleration before look-ahead interpolation.
Unit of data: ms
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13612 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13613 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1772: Time constant for bell-shaped look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before 
interpolation of constant acceleration time type


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1383 -
CAUTION
A set time constant is applied to all axes. So, a modification made to this item 
changes the settings for all axes.
M
- Allowable acceleration change value in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
change under jerk control.
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13614 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13615 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1788: Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on 
acceleration change under jerk control
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function is enabled.
M
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on 
acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation
operations
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13616 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13617 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1789: Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on 
acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation
operations
CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operations
CAUTION
1 For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the parameters (allowable acceleration
change value in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control: 
No. 13614, No.13615) are valid.
2 For an axis with 0 set in the parameter (allowable acceleration change value in 
velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control: No. 13614, 
No.13615), velocity control based on acceleration change is disabled, so that 
this parameter has no effect.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1384 -
M
- Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in look-ahead smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Unit of data: %
Set the ratio (in %) of the change time of jerk control to the change time of acceleration in look-ahead 
smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13618 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13619 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1790: Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in look-ahead smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function is enabled.
- Allowable acceleration rate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Allowable acceleration rate
Set an allowable acceleration rate in acceleration-based speed determination.
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13620 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13621 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 1735: Allowable acceleration rate for each axis applicable to the deceleration function
based on acceleration in circular interpolation
Parameter No. 1737: Allowable acceleration rate for each axis applicable to the deceleration function
based on acceleration in AI contour control
CAUTION
When bit 0 (MCR) of parameter No. 13600 is set to 1, the deceleration function
based on acceleration in circular interpolation is not set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
Unit of data: ms
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13622 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13623 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1385 -
- Corner speed difference
Set an allowable corner speed difference used for speed determination.
Unit of data: mm/sec, inch/sec, deg/sec (machine unit)
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13624 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13625 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 1783: Allowable speed difference for each axis in automatic corner deceleration based 
on speed difference
- Maximum cutting speed
Set a maximum cutting speed for each axis.
Unit of data: mm/sec, inch/sec, deg/sec (machine unit)
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13626 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13627 (precision-emphasized parameter)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the following parameter is also set from the precision level:
Parameter No. 1432: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the AI contour control mode
- Arbitrary items
Two arbitrary parameters can be registered. Each item can correspond to a CNC parameter or servo
parameter. A parameter number corresponding to each item is to be specified with parameters.
As indicated below (Table 12.4.8.1 (b)), set the parameters for corresponding parameter numbers,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
velocity-emphasized parameters (precision level 1), and precision-emphasized parameters (precision level
10).
Table 12.4.8.1 (b) Parameters related to arbitrary items
Corresponding
parameter number
Setting of velocity-emphasized 
(precision level 1) value
Setting of precision-emphasized 
(precision level 10) value
Arbitrary item 1 No.13628 No.13630 No.13632
Arbitrary item 2 No.13629 No.13631 No.13633
• Display
Tuning target parameter numbers are displayed.
CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CAUTION
As arbitrary items, the numbers of the following parameters cannot be specified:
- Bit parameter
- Spindle parameters (Parameters Nos. 4000 to 4799)
- Real-type parameter
- Power-off parameter
- Nonexistent parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1386 -
12.4.9 Displaying Memory Data
The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address.
Displaying memory data
Procedure
1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display screen.
2 Press function key .
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [MEMORY].
The following screen (Fig. 12.4.9) appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.9 (a) Memory contents display screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. Starting at the 
specified address, 256-byte data is displayed.
(Example: When you input 100000 then press [ADDRES SEARCH], data is displayed starting at 
100000H.)
5 Display data can be switched by using page keys and and cursor keys , ,
, and/or .
6 By pressing soft key [BYTE], [WORD], [LONG], or [DOUBLE], select a data type to be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options:
Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal)
Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal)
Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal)
Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display) 
One screen displays 256-byte memory data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1387 -
NOTE
1 When an address is input, "H" for representing "hexadecimal" need not be 
specified at the end of the address. If H is added, a warning is displayed to 
indicate that the format is invalid.
2 When word display is selected as the display format, an input address is 
rounded to a multiple of 2 bytes. When long display or double display is selected, 
an input address is rounded to a multiple of 4 bytes.
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
WARNING
1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a 
system alarm is issued.
When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that 
the address is input correctly.
2 This function is designed for maintenance, and must not be used by general 
users.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1388 -
12.4.10 Parameter Tuning Screen
The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the 
following:
1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collectively 
displayed to facilitate start-up of the machine.
2 The servo tuning screen, spindle tuning screen, and machining parameter tuning screen are displayed
for smooth tuning.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
for smooth tuning.
The parameter tuning screen consists of a menu screen and several setting screens.
12.4.10.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item
The parameter tuning menu screen displays the following items:
[START UP]
- SYSTEM SETTING
- AXIS SETTING
- FSSB (SV AMP)
- FSSB (SP AMP)
- FSSB (AXIS)
- SERVO SETTING
- SPINDLE SETTING
- MISCELLANY
[TUNING]
- SERVO TUNING
- SPINDLE TUNING
- AICC TUNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- AICC TUNING
On the parameter tuning menu screen, one of the displayed items can be selected to display the 
corresponding screen. From each setting screen, you can return to the menu screen by performing a soft 
key operation.
NOTE
1 Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
2 When bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 is set to 0, "SERVO SETTING" and 
"SERVO TUNING" are not displayed. When bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set to 0, "SPINDLE TUNING" is not displayed.
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen
Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for 
"PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Parameters”.
3 Press function key .
4 Press the continuous menu key several times.
5 Press soft key [PARAM TUNING] to display the menu screen for parameter tuning .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1389 -
Fig. 12.4.10.1 (a) Menu screen for parameter tuning (10.4-inch display unit)
6 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or .
7 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen.
Returning to the menu screen
Procedure
1 Press soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the menu screen and selecting a menu item”. The screen and soft keys shown below (Fig. 12.4.10.1
(b) are displayed. (The screen below (Fig. 12.4.10.1 (b) is displayed when "AXIS SETTING" is 
selected.)
Fig. 12.4.10.1 (b) Axis setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1390 -
2 Press the continuous menu key several times.
3 Press soft key [MENU].
The screen display returns to the parameter tuning menu screen.
4 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to 
"DISABLED".
NOTE
Some setting screens can also be displayed by a chapter selection soft key. If a 
screen is selected using a chapter selection soft key, however, you cannot return


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to the parameter tuning menu screen.
Explanation
- Items displayed with [START UP]
The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting 
up the machine.
Table 12.4.10.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP]
Display item Description
SYSTEM SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to the entire system configuration
AXIS SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and 
acceleration/deceleration


key: chroma:document
string_value:
acceleration/deceleration
FSSB (SV AMP) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
FSSB (SP AMP) FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen
FSSB (AXIS) FSSB axis setting screen
SERVO SETTING Servo setting screen
SPINDLE SETTING Screen for setting spindle-related parameters
MISCELLANY Screen for setting parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits 
and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Items displayed with [TUNING]
The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo, spindle, and high-speed high-precision machining
tuning.
Table. 12.4.10.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING]
Display item Description
SERVO TUNING Servo tuning screen
SPINDLE TUNING Spindle tuning screen
AICC TUNING Machining parameter tuning screen
NOTE
1 Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
2 When bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 is set to 0, "SERVO SETTING" and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"SERVO TUNING" are not displayed. When bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 is 
set to 0, "SPINDLE TUNING" is not displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1391 -
12.4.10.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting)
This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified. 
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
Display and setting
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to [SYSTEM SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu 
item”.
2 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the screen and soft keys shown below (Fig. 
12.4.10.2).
Fig. 12.4.10.2 (a) Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods 
below.
- Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Move the cursor to the desired parameter number by pressing page key or , and 
cursor keys , , , and/or .
A brief description of the parameter where the cursor is placed is provided at the bottom of the 
screen. However, no description is provided when the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit 
parameters.
4 Input desired data then press the key on the MDI unit to set the parameter.
5 Press soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item selected by the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state initializes the item 
to the standard value.
6 Press soft key [G_INIT]. A message asking whether to set the group standard values is displayed on 
the screen. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state inputs all of the standard values of the group.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1392 -
NOTE
1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no 
standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed.
2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits 
can be input simultaneously. When [INIT] is pressed in this state, the key input
buffer displays the standard values for the bits where the cursor is placed. If a bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
has no standard value assigned, "*" is displayed for the bit, and no value is input
for the bit.
3 When [G_INIT] is pressed, those parameters that have no standard values 
assigned are not initialized.
12.4.10.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting)
This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and 
acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four 
groups:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
groups:
(Basic) group : The parameters related to basic settings are displayed.
(Coordinate) group : The parameters related to coordinates are displayed.
(Feedrate) group : The parameters related to feedrate are displayed.
(Acceleration/deceleration) group : The parameters related to acceleration/deceleration are displayed.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC). For the display and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”.
Fig. 12.4.10.3 (a) Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1393 -
12.4.10.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting
screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details 
of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.10.4 (a) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.10.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB spindle amplifier setting
screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details 
of the FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB spindle amplifier setting
screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1394 -
12.4.10.6 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB
axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in 
the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.10.6 (a) FSSB axis setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.4.10.7 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
setting screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Parameters”.
Fig. 12.4.10.7 (a) Servo setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1395 -
12.4.10.8 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting)
The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified.
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”.
Fig. 12.4.10.8 (a) Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.10.9 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting
and spindle tuning screens can be displayed and modified. Moreover, the parameters can be initialized to 
the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”.
Fig. 12.4.10.9 (a) Parameter tuning screen (Miscellaneous setting) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1396 -
12.4.10.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuning”.
Fig. 12.4.10.10 (a) Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.10.11 Displaying and setting the spindle tuning screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the spindle tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the spindle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Spindle Tuning”.
Fig. 12.4.10.11 (a) Spindle tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1397 -
12.4.10.12 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning
screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of 
the machining parameter tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Machining Parameter Tuning”.
Fig. 12.4.10.12 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Parameters displayed for parameter tuning


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 12.4.10.12 (a) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (1)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
SYSTEM
SETTING
System
setting
981 Sets the path of each axis.
982 Sets the path of each spindle.
983 Sets the T series/M series of each path. 
0:T series / 1:M series
3021 Sets the G/F signal address of each axis. *1
3022 Sets the G/F signal address of each spindle. *2
3006#0 GDC The deceleration signal for reference position return is:
0:X signal / 1:G signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0:X signal / 1:G signal
1
3008#2 XSG The signal address allocated to address X is: 
0:Fixed / 1:Set by the parameter
1
3013 Address allocated to the deceleration signal for 
reference position return
*3
3014 Bit position allocated to the deceleration signal for 
reference position return
*4
*1 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1)
When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes:
0,1,...,7,(none) for axes of path 1, 10,11,12 for axes of path 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1398 -
*2 : When intra-path spindle number ≤ 4, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path spindle number - 1)
When intra-path spindle number ≥ 5, no standard value is available. 
Example) When path 1 has 5 spindles, and path 2 has 1 spindle:
0,1,...,4,(none) for spindles of path 1, 10 for spindle of path 2
*3 : When (path number ≤ 3) and (intra-path axis number ≤ 8)
Axes of path 1: 9
Axes of path 2: 7
Axes of path 3: 10


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Axes of path 3: 10
Other axes: No standard value is available.
Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes:
9,9,9,9,9,9,9,9,(none) for axes of path 1, 7,7,7 for axes of path 2
*4 : When (path number ≤ 3) and (intra-path axis number ≤ 8)
(Intra-path axis number - 1)
Other axes: No standard value is available.
Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes:
0,1,...,7,(none) for axes of path 1, 0,1,2 for axes of path 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 12.4.10.12 (b) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (2)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
SPINDLE
SETTING
Spindle
setting
3716#0 A/S Sets the type of spindle motor: 0:Analaog / 1:Serial.
3717 Sets an amplifier number to be assigned to each 
spindle.
3706#4 GTT Specifies a spindle gear selection method.
0:M type / 1:T type
3718 Sets a suffix to be added to spindle speed display on a 
screen such as the position display screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3735 Sets the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
3736 Sets the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
3741 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 1.
3742 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 2.
3743 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 3.
3744 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 4.
3772 Sets the maximum speed of the spindle.
When 0 is set, the speed is not clamped.
4133 Sets the motor model code of the serial spindle.
(This setting is not required for an analog spindle.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4019#7 *** The parameters for the serial spindle are:
0:Not automatically set / 1:Automatically set
(This setting is not required for an analog spindle.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1399 -
Table 12.4.10.12 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
AXIS
SETTING
Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes:
0:Metric (millimeter machine) / 1:Inch (inch machine)
1005#0 ZRNx When an automatic operation (other than G28) is 
executed before reference position return:
0:Alarm is issued (PS224) / 1:No alarm is issued.
0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0
1005#1 DLZx Reference position return without dogs: 
0:Disabled / 1:Enabled
1006#0 ROTx Setting of linear axes or rotary axis:
0:Linear axis / 1:Rotation axis
1006#3 DIAx Setting of the amount of travel:
0:Radius specification / 1: Diameter specification
1006#5 ZMIx Reference position return direction:
0:Plus direction / 1:Minus direction
1008#0 ROAx Rotation axis roll-over function: 
0:Disabled / 1:Enabled
1
1008#2 RRLx With the amount of travel per revolution, relative 
coordinates are:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
coordinates are:
0:Not rounded / 1:Rounded
1
1013#0 ISAx Sets the least input increment and least command
increment:
0:IS-B / 1:IS-A
1013#1 ISCx Sets the least input increment and least command
increment:
0:IS-B / 1:IS-C
1020 Program axis name *1
1022 Sets each axis in the basic coordinate system. *2
1023 Servo axis number
1815#1 OPTx A separate pulse coder is: 0:Not used / 1:Used
1815#4 APZx The correspondence between machine positions and 
absolute-position detector positions is:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0:Not established / 1:Established
1815#5 APCx The position detector used is: 
0:Other than an absolute-position detector /
1:Absolute-position detector
1825 Servo loop gain
1826 Effective area
1828 Positional deviation limit during travel
1829 Positional deviation limit during stop 500
*1 : For the M series: 88(X),89(Y),90(Z) sequentially starting with the first axis (no standard value for the 
fourth axis and up)
For the T series: 88(X),90(Z) (no standard value for the third axis and up)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
*2 : For the M series: 1,2,3 sequentially starting with the first axis (no standard value for the fourth axis and 
up)
For the T series: 1,3 (no standard value for the third axis and up)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1400 -
Table 12.4.10.12 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
AXIS
SETTING
Coordin
ate
1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position
1241 Machine coordinate of the second reference position
1260 Amount of travel per revolution of a rotary axis 360.000
1320 Coordinate of the boundary of stored stroke check 1 in 
the positive direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the positive direction
1321 Coordinate of the boundary of stored stroke check 1 in 
the negative direction
Feedrate 1401#6 RDR For a rapid traverse command, dry run is:
0:Disabled / 1:Enabled
0
1410 Dry run feedrate
1420 Rapid traverse rate
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
1423 Jog feedrate
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate
1425 FL feedrate for reference position return
1428 Reference position return feedrate
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate
Acceleration/
deceleration


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Acceleration/
deceleration
1610#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run
during cutting feed:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied /
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 
is applied
1610#4 JGLx Acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration /
1: Same as acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed 
(The settings of bit 1 (CTBx) and bit 0 (CTLx) of 
parameter No. 1610 are followed.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1620 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration for 
rapid traverse
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for cutting
feed
1623 FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after 
interpolation for cutting feed
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for jog feed
1625 FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration
for jog feed
MISCELL
ANY
MISC 3030 Allowable number of digits of an M code 3
3111#0 SVS The servo setting screen is: 0:Not displayed / 
1:Displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1401 -
12.4.11 Periodic Maintenance Screen
Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit 
and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting 
down the life time, the life of the consumable can be counted down in the appropriate method set for the 
consumable, and the remaining life time can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With these screens, the user can easily manage consumables that require periodic replacement.
The total number of item that can be managed is 10 in all path.
Explanation
There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu 
screen, and the NC menu screen.
Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item names 
are set.
Setting screen : Life times, remaining times, count types (count-down method), and path number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(in case of multi-path system) are set.
Machine menu screen : The names of consumables in the machine can be registered.
NC menu screen : The names of consumables in the NC are already registered.
Using periodic maintenance screens
<1> Referencing a periodic maintenance screen
Display the status screen. For the meanings of items on the status screen, see Item, “Status screen”.
<2> Adding the name of a new consumable item to a periodic maintenance screen or editing an existing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
consumable item on the screen
The name of a consumable item can be added or edited on the machine menu screen. For details, see 
Item, “Machine menu screen”.
<3> Adding or editing a life time, remaining time, and a method of counting down the remaining time for 
a consumable on a periodic maintenance screen
A life time and remaining time can be added or edited on the setting screen. For details, see Item, 
“Setting screen”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“Setting screen”.
<4> Newly displaying the item name and remaining time of a consumable on a periodic maintenance 
screen.
1 Setting an item name
Select the item name of a consumable to be displayed from the machine menu screen or NC 
menu screen, or enter the name using the MDI keys. For the procedure, see Item, “Item name”
in “Status screen”.
2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type
Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting screen. For the procedure, see Item, “Remaining time” in “Status screen”.
Procedure for displaying a periodic maintenance screen
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display [PERIOD MAINTE].
3 Press soft key [PERIOD MAINTE] to display the periodic maintenance screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1402 -
Status screen
When soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the item 
names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables.
Fig. 12.4.11 (a) Status screen
- Item name
As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item 
name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter the name using


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the MDI keys.
Setting an item name from a menu screen
1 On the status screen, move the cursor to a target item name, press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft 
key [ENTRY].
2 Press soft key [MACHINE] or [NC] to display the machine menu screen or NC menu screen.
3 Move the cursor to an existing item name on the menu screen, press soft key [(OPRT)], and press 
soft key [SELECT] then [EXEC] successively.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is 
added to the status screen.
Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in 
advance. For the registration method, see the description of the procedure for registering item names on 
the machine menu screen.
Setting an item name using the MDI keys
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
2 Type the alphanumeric characters to be input, then press soft key [INPUT].
3 The entered item name is registered on the status screen.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed instead of soft key [INPUT], the entered characters can be added to 
an existing item name.
When typing 2-byte characters, type "*" before and after the character codes. The 2-byte character codes 
must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters 
only; or it must be up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example: To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1403 -
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In 
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte 
characters is registered, the warning "DATA OUT OF RANGE" may be output.
Deleting an item name
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press


key: chroma:document
string_value:
soft key [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, its life time, remaining time, and count type are deleted at the same time.
- Remaining time
As the remaining time, the period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down 
operation is displayed.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached to the value (%) specified by 
parameter No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Setting the remaining time
1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item 
name must have been set in advance).
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft key [CHANGE].
3 The screen display changes to the setting screen.
4 Set the life time, remaining time, and count type. For the setting method and other information, see 
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE
On the status screen, the remaining time and life time cannot be set.
These items must be set on the setting screen.
- Count status
The count status is indicated on the left side of the item number as follows:
Indication Count status
Blank Counting stopped
@ Counting in progress
* Life expired


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1404 -
Setting screen
On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, and count type of a managed consumable are set.
Fig. 12.4.11 (b) Setting screen
Display procedure
1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [CHANGE]. 
- Life time
Set the life time of a consumable.
Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The


key: chroma:document
string_value:
life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time.
At this time, "------" is indicated in the count type field.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the life time already set. The same 
value as the added value is added also to the remaining time.
A value ranging from 0 to 65535 (in hours) can be set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name is not registered, the 
warning "EDIT REJECTED" is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 If a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning "DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE" is issued.
3 If soft key [ERASE] or [TYPE] is pressed, the warning "EDIT REJECTED" is 
issued.
- Remaining time
The period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down operation is indicated.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached the value (%) specified by parameter
No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press 
soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the remaining time already set.
A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set.
When soft key [ERASE] then soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the life time is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1405 -
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not 
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT 
OF RANGE” is issued.
3 If horizontal soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is 
issued.
- Count type
As the count type, select the way of counting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press soft key [TYPE]. Count 
types are displayed as soft keys as shown below. Select one of these soft keys, then press soft key 
[EXEC].
Soft key Meaning Indication
[NO CNT] Counting is not performed (stopped) — — — — — —
[ALL] Counting is performed at all times All times
[POWER ON] Counting is performed when power is on. When power is on


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[RUN] Counting is performed when operation is in progress. When operation is in progress
[CUT] Counting is performed when cutting is being performed. When cutting is being performed
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not 
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 Soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] have no effect.
3 When counting is performed at all times, a 24-hour error is generated in leap 
year.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
year.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
- Path number
When [RUN] or [CUT] is set to the count type in multi path, path number can be set.
Make the cursor to the count type of a target registration number, then input path number and press soft 
key [INPUT].
The setting range is 0-(max path number).
When the specified path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
If 0 is set, when either of path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 If [NO CNT], [ALL] or [POWER ON] is set to count type, “--” is displayed. In this 
case, if the setting is operated, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 If the setting is beyond the valid data range, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE” is issued.
3 If soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. The 
soft key [+INPUT] is invalid.
Registration from a program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Registration from a program
The item name, life time, remaining time, count type and path number can be registered in the status 
screen and the setting screen by executing the program of the following format.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1406 -
Format
G10 L60 Px [n] Aa Rr Qpt
X : Registration number
n : Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
a : life time
r : remaining time
p : path number
t : count type
The meaning of the value of the count type is as follow.
0 : NO COUNT
1 : ALL TIMES
2 : POWER ON
3 : RUNNING
4 : CUTTING
The range of the path number is 0 – (max path number).
EX.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
EX.)
Q24 : The path number is 2, and the count type is “CUTTING”
Q103 : The path number is 10, and the count type is “RUNNING”
Machine menu screen
On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen, 
item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the 
description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.11 (c) Machine menu screen
- Displaying the screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Displaying the screen
1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE].
On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods:
- Registration from a program
- Registration using the MDI keys


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1407 -
- Registration from a program
By executing a program having the following format, an item name can be registered in the menu of the 
machine:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]
X Registration number
n Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
- Registration using the MDI keys
An item name can be registered on the menu screen of the machine by typing the item name in the format


key: chroma:document
string_value:
shown below on the machine menu screen, then pressing soft key [INPUT] (or the key).
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the typed characters can be added to an already registered item 
name.
Format
Alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters
Two-byte character codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE 
CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be 
up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example:
To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In 
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte 
characters is registered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” may be output.
3 When a blank item name is selected on the machine screen, the warning “EDIT 
REJECTED” is issued.
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press 
soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1408 -
NC menu screen
From this screen, an item name can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to 
the status screen, see the description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.11 (d) NC menu screen
- Displaying the screen
1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [NC].
NOTE
On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be 
performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performed.
When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set.
12.4.12 System Configuration Screen
The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software.
Procedure for displaying the screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a screen that shows parameters and other information.
2 Press soft key [SYSTEM]. The system configuration screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
There are two types of system configuration screens: the hardware configuration screen and the software 
configuration screen. The screen display can switch between these screens by using and . 
When soft key [SERVO INFO] or [SPINDLE INFO] is pressed, information about the connected servo 
system or spindles is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1409 -
Fig. 12.4.12 (a) System configuration screen
Hardware configuration screen
This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.12 (b) Hardware configuration screen
Software configuration screen
This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.12 (c) Software configuration screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1410 -
Servo information screen
When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo 
motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen
1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press soft key [SERVO INFO].
2 The servo information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.12 (d) Servo information screen
Spindle information screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Spindle information screen
When a spindle system is connected to the NC, the ID information of the connected spindle devices 
(spindle motors and spindle amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen
1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press soft key [SPINDLE INFO].
2 The spindle information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.12 (e) Spindle information screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1411 -
12.4.13 Power Consumption Monitoring Screen
The electric power data of servo axis and spindle axis consumption and regeneration can be displayed.
Display of power consumption monitoring screen
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [POWER MONIT] appears.
4 Press soft key [POWER MONIT].
Fig. 12.4.13 (a) Power consumption monitoring screen for 10.4-inch display unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Operation of power consumption monitoring screen
Switch of display axis
When information on all axes is not displayed, the page is switched with the MDI key <PageUp> or 
<PageDown>.
Clear cumulative power consumption value
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [TOTAL CLEAR].
Soft key [EXEC] and [CAN] appear.
3 Press soft key [EXEC].
Cumulative power consumption and cumulative time start from 0.
To quit clear operation, press soft key [CAN].
Explanation
TIME


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
TIME
Integrating time of power consumption is displayed.
Axis name
Axis name of servo and spindle is displayed. "ALL" means the total amount of power consumption.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1412 -
CONSUMP
Integral power consumption is displayed.
REGEN
Integral power regeneration is displayed.
NET
Integral net amount of power consumption is displayed. 
The net amount of power consumption = power consumption – power regeneration.
PRESENT
Present net power consumption is displayed. A negative value is displayed about the net power 
consumption while the power is regenerating like the axis is decelerating, etc.
Bar-graph


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Bar-graph
Current net power consumption is displayed as a bar-graph.
The scale of bar-graph can be specified in the parameter (No.11392 in case of the servo, No.11393 in case 
of the spindle).
The scale of the entire power consumption bar-graph can be specified in the parameter (No.11371).
The bar expands from the center to right while consuming the electric power. The bar expands from the 
center to left while regenerating the electric power.
Unit of data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Unit of data
When the cumulative power consumption value can no longer be displayed in kWh, unit of data is 
switched to MWh automatically
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1413 -
12.4.14 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and 
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of 
parameters depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters
Procedure
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling 
parameter writing described below.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
Fig. 12.4.14 (a) PARAMETER screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways: 
- Enter the parameter number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH] .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, and , and cursor 
keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. 
The parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1414 -
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.14 (b) SETTING screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.
5 Press horizontal soft key [ON:1] to enable parameter writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 After completing parameter setting, move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE on the setting screen 
again, and press horizontal soft key [OFF:0].
7 Depress the key to release the alarm condition.
When an alarm PW0000 occurred, however, it is not released unless the power is turned off and 
back on.
Explanation
- Setting parameters with external input/output devices
See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as 
the memory card.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
acceptable". Setting 1 for PARAMETER WRITE is not necessary when three parameters are set on the 
setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1415 -
12.4.15 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)
This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time 
of field tuning of the machine tool.
Procedure for servo parameter setting
Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press function key then vertical soft key [SERVO PARAM]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.15 (a) Servo parameter setting screen (15-inch display unit)
4 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the 
position of data to be set or modified.
5 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1416 -
12.4.16 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set.
Procedure for servo tuning
Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
3 Press function key then vertical soft key [SERVO PARAM].
4 Press vertical soft key [SERVO TUNE] to select the servo tuning screen. The servo tuning screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
appears:
Fig. 12.4.16 (a) Servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the 
position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1417 -
12.4.17 Spindle Setting (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Parameters related to spindles are set and displayed. In addition to the parameters, related data can be 
displayed. Screens for spindle setting, spindle tuning, and spindle monitoring are provided.
Setting spindle parameters
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key then vertical soft key [SPINDL SETING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press vertical soft key [SPINDL SETING] to select the spindle setting screen. 
4 The spindle setting screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.17 (a) Spindle setting screen (15-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the 
position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1418 -
12.4.18 Spindle Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Spindle tuning data is displayed and set.
Setting for spindle tuning
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key then vertical soft key [SPINDL SETING].
3 Press vertical soft key [SPINDL TUNE] to select the spindle tuning screen. 
4 The spindle tuning screen appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.18 (a) Spindle tuning screen (15-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the 
position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1419 -
12.4.19 Spindle Monitor (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Spindle-related data is displayed.
Displaying the spindle monitor
Procedure
1 Set bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display spindle setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key then vertical soft key [SPINDL SETING].
3 Press vertical soft key [SPINDL MONIT.] to select the spindle monitor screen. 
4 The spindle monitor screen appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1420 -
12.4.20 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen.
Displaying the color setting screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [COLOR].
3 Press vertical soft key [COLOR] to display the color setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.20 (a) Color setting screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for operating the color setting screen
- Modifying the color (color palette values)
1 The following horizontal soft keys are displayed:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified.
The current color palette value set for each primary color is displayed.
3 Select a primary color whose setting is to be modified, with the corresponding horizontal soft key
[RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
More than one primary color can be selected at the same time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Each time horizontal soft key [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] is pressed, the operation soft key
toggles between selection and deselection.
4 Select horizontal soft key [BRIGHT] or [DARK] to modify the brightness of the selected prime 
color(s).
- Storing the color (color palette values)
The set color palette values can be stored.
1 Press horizontal soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1421 -
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595
COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to 10435
COLOR3 Parameters Nos. 10461 to 10475
2 Press horizontal soft key [MEMORY]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] stores the current color palette settings in the selected area.
Pressing horizontal soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not store the current color palette


key: chroma:document
string_value:
settings in the selected area.
- Calling the color (color palette values)
1 Press horizontal soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color
palette values are stored.
2 Press horizontal soft key [RECALL]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] calls the color palette values from the selected area to enable 
the color to be modified. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are stored.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pressing horizontal soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not call the color palette values from the 
selected area.
NOTE
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, the settings of COLOR1 (parameters) 
are used for display. If nothing is stored for COLOR1, the default colors are used 
for display.
2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When 
modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the 
color setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1422 -
12.4.21 Machining Parameter Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)
12.4.21.1 Machining parameter tuning (AI contour)
In AI contour control, by setting a velocity-emphasized parameter set and precision-emphasized 
parameter set of machining condition selection function and setting the precision level matching a 
machining condition such as rough machining or finish machining on the precision level setting screen or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by programming, the parameters suitable for the condition can be automatically calculated to perform 
machining.
On this screen, the parameter sets for emphasis on velocity (precision level 1) and emphasis on precision 
(precision level 10) can be set.
Set the following parameters:
- Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
- Acceleration change time (bell-shaped)
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change


key: chroma:document
string_value:
under jerk control
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in acceleration change under jerk control in 
successive linear interpolation operations
- Ratio of the change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
- Allowable acceleration rate
- Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
- Corner speed difference
- Maximum feedrate
- Items that can be set freely (2 items)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For details of each parameter, see the descriptions of AI contour control and jerk control (M Series).
By setting bit 0 (MPR) of parameter No. 13601 to 1, this screen can be hidden.
For the method of setting a precision level, see the description of the precision level selection screen in 
Subsection, “Precision Level Selection”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1423 -
Procedure for machining parameter tuning
Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [MCHN TUNING]. 
The machining parameter tuning screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.21.1 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (AI contour) (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the 
cursor to the parameter.
5 Key in desired data then press the key on the MDI unit.
6 When data is input, a RMS value is found according to the precision level parameters. (The 
precision level can be changed on the precision level selection screen or parameter setting screen.) If 
a RMS value calculation fails, a warning (indicating that automatic setting failed) is displayed.
7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all machining parameters are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 In addition to the setting method described above, a parameter setting method using horizontal soft 
keys is available. Pressing horizontal soft key [INIT] displays the standard value (recommended by 
FANUC) of the item selected by the cursor in the key input buffer. Pressing horizontal soft key
[EXEC] initializes the item to the standard value. Pressing horizontal soft key [GROUP INIT] 
initializes all items of a group (emphasis on velocity or emphasis on precision) selected by the cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1424 -
The table below indicates the initial settings.
Table 12.4.21.1 (a) Initial settings
Setting item
AI contour control
Unit Emphasis
on velocity
(LV1)
Emphasis on 
precision
(LV10)
Acceleration rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
<ACC FOR BIPL> 4902.000 1042.000 mm/sec2
Acceleration change time (bell-shaped) <ACC CHG TIME(BELL)> 32 64 msec
Allowable acceleration change value <JERK ACC DIFF> 0 0 mm/sec2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1660: Maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation
- Acceleration change time (bell-shaped)
Set a time constant for a bell-shaped portion in look-ahead acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
Unit of data: ms
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13612 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13613 (precision-emphasized parameter)
When bit 7 of parameter No. 13600 is set to 1, the parameter set on the machining parameter tuning 
screen is reflected in the following parameters for which the valid data range is extended to the range 
from 0 to 200:
Parameter No. 13662 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13663 (precision-emphasized parameter)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1772: Time constant for look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before 
interpolation of constant acceleration time type
CAUTION
A set time constant is applied to all axes. So, a modification made to this item 
changes the settings for all axes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1425 -
- Allowable acceleration change value in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control.
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13614 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13615 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1788: Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on 
acceleration change under jerk control
NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function (M Series) is 
enabled.
- Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on


key: chroma:document
string_value:
acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation
operations
Unit of data: mm/sec2
, inch/sec2
, deg/sec2 (machine unit)
Set an allowable acceleration change value per ms for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration
change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation operations.
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13616 (velocity-emphasized parameter)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13617 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1789: Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on 
acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation
operations
CAUTION
1 For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the parameters (allowable acceleration
change value in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
No. 13614, No.13615) are valid.
2 For an axis with 0 set in the parameter (allowable acceleration change value in 
velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control: No. 13614, 
No.13615), velocity control based on acceleration change is disabled, so that 
this parameter has no effect.
NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function (M Series) is 
enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1426 -
- Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Unit of data: %
Set the ratio (in %) of the change time of jerk control to the change time of acceleration in smooth 
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter No. 13618 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13619 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:
Parameter No. 1790: Ratio of the change time of the jerk control in smooth bell-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function (M Series) is 
enabled.
- Allowable acceleration rate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1427 -
- Corner speed difference
Set an allowable corner speed difference used for speed determination.
Unit of data: mm/sec, inch/sec, deg/sec (machine unit)
The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in the following parameters:
Parameter No. 13624 (velocity-emphasized parameter)
Parameter No. 13625 (precision-emphasized parameter)
Moreover, the following parameter is also set according to the precision level:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the following parameter is also set from the precision level:
Parameter No. 1432: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the AI contour control mode
- Arbitrary items
Two arbitrary parameters can be registered. Each item can correspond to a CNC parameter or servo
parameter. A parameter number corresponding to each item is to be specified with parameters.
As indicated below, set the parameters for corresponding parameter numbers, velocity-emphasized


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameters (precision level 1), and precision-emphasized parameters (precision level 10).
Table 12.4.21.1 (b) Parameters related to arbitrary items
Corresponding
parameter number
Setting of velocity-emphasized 
(precision level 1) value
Setting of precision-emphasized 
(precision level 10) value
Arbitrary item 1 No.13628 No.13630 No.13632
Arbitrary item 2 No.13629 No.13631 No.13633
- Display
Tuning target parameter numbers are displayed.
CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1428 -
12.4.22 Displaying Memory Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address.
Displaying memory data
Procedure
1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display screen.
2 Press function key .
3 Press vertical soft key [MEMORY]. 
The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.22 (a) Memory contents display screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press horizontal soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. 
Starting at the specified address, 256-byte data is displayed.
(Example: When you input 100000 then press [ADDRES SEARCH], data is displayed starting at 
100000H.)
5 Display data can be switched by using page keys and and cursor keys , ,
, and/or .
6 By pressing horizontal soft key [BYTE], [WORD], [LONG], or [DOUBLE], select a data type to be 
displayed.
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed.
Explanation
A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options:
Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal)
Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal)
Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal)
Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display) 
One screen displays 256-byte memory data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1429 -
NOTE
1 When an address is input, "H" for representing "hexadecimal" need not be 
specified at the end of the address. If H is added, a warning is displayed to 
indicate that the format is invalid.
2 When word display is selected as the display format, an input address is 
rounded to a multiple of 2 bytes. When long display or double display is selected, 
an input address is rounded to a multiple of 4 bytes.
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
WARNING
1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a 
system alarm is issued.
When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that 
the address is input correctly.
2 This function is designed for maintenance, and must not be used by general 
users.
12.4.23 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the 
following:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
following:
1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collectively 
displayed to facilitate start-up of the machine.
2 The servo tuning screen, spindle tuning screen, and machining parameter tuning screen are displayed
for smooth tuning.
The parameter tuning screen consists of a menu screen and several setting screens.
12.4.23.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item 
(15/19-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(15/19-inch display unit)
The parameter tuning menu screen displays the following items:
[START UP]
- SYSTEM SETTING
- AXIS SETTING
- FSSB (SV AMP)
- FSSB (SP AMP)
- FSSB (AXIS)
- SERVO SETTING
- SPINDLE SETTING
- MISCELLANY
[TUNING]
- SERVO TUNING
- SPINDLE TUNING
- AICC TUNING
On the parameter tuning menu screen, one of the displayed items can be selected to display the 
corresponding screen. From each setting screen, you can return to the menu screen by performing a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1430 -
NOTE
1 Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
2 When bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 is set to 0, "SERVO SETTING" and 
"SERVO TUNING" are not displayed. When bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 is 
set to 0, "SPINDLE TUNING" is not displayed.
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen
Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for 
"PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)”.
3 Press function key .
4 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times then press vertical soft key [PARAM TUNING]. 
The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.23.1 (a) Parameter tuning menu screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or .
6 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1431 -
Returning to the menu screen
Procedure
1 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection
III-12.4.27.1. The screen and soft keys shown below (Fig. 12.4.23.1 (b)) are displayed. (The screen
below (Fig. 12.4.23.1 (b)) is displayed when "AXIS SETTING" is selected.)
Fig. 12.4.23.1 (b) Axis setting screen (15-inch display unit)
2 Press horizontal soft key [MENU].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The screen display returns to the parameter tuning menu screen.
3 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to 
"DISABLED".
NOTE
Part of the setting screens can be displayed also by using a vertical soft key for 
chapter selection. When these screens are displayed using the vertical soft key 
for chapter selection, it becomes impossible to return to the parameter tuning 
menu screen.
Explanation
- Items displayed with [START UP]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting 
up the machine.
Table 12.4.23.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP]
Display item Description
SYSTEM SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to the entire system configuration
AXIS SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and 
acceleration/deceleration
FSSB (SV AMP) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FSSB (SP AMP) FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen
FSSB (AXIS) FSSB axis setting screen
SERVO SETTING Servo setting screen
SPINDLE SETTING Screen for setting spindle-related parameters
MISCELLANY Screen for setting parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits 
and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1432 -
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
- Items displayed with [TUNING]
The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo, spindle, and high-speed high-precision machining
tuning.
Table 12.4.23.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING]
Display item Description
SERVO TUNING Servo tuning screen
SPINDLE TUNING Spindle tuning screen
AICC TUNING Machining parameter tuning screen
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
2 When bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 is set to 0, "SERVO SETTING" and 
"SERVO TUNING" are not displayed. When bit 1 (SPS) of parameter No. 3111 is 
set to 0, "SPINDLE TUNING" is not displayed.
12.4.23.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch display 
unit)
This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
Display and setting
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to [SYSTEM SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter
tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item 
(15/19-inch display unit)”.
2 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the screen and horizontal soft 
keys shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
keys shown below.
Fig. 12.4.23.2 (a) Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1433 -
3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods 
below.
- Input the desired parameter number, then press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
- Move the cursor to the desired parameter number by pressing page key or , and 
cursor keys , , , and/or .
A brief description of the parameter where the cursor is placed is provided at the bottom of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. However, no description is provided when the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit 
parameters.
4 Input desired data then press the key on the MDI unit to set the parameter.
5 Press horizontal soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item 
selected by the cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] in 
this state initializes the item to the standard value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press horizontal soft key [GROUP INIT]. A message asking whether to set the group standard values 
is displayed on the screen. Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] in this state inputs all of the standard
values of the group.
NOTE
1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no 
standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed.
2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits


key: chroma:document
string_value:
can be input simultaneously. When [INIT] is pressed in this state, the key input
buffer displays the standard values for the bits where the cursor is placed. If a bit 
has no standard value assigned, "*" is displayed for the bit, and no value is input
for the bit.
3 When [GROUP INIT] is pressed, those parameters that have no standard values 
assigned are not initialized.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1434 -
12.4.23.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15/19-inch display 
unit)
This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and 
acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four 
groups:
(Basic) group : The parameters related to basic settings are displayed.
(Coordinate) group : The parameters related to coordinates are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Feedrate) group : The parameters related to feedrate are displayed.
(Acceleration/deceleration) group : The parameters related to acceleration/deceleration are displayed.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC). For the display and 
setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (axis setting) in Subsection, 
“Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch display unit)”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1435 -
12.4.23.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting
screen (15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details 
of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.23.4 (a) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (15-inch display unit)
12.4.23.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB spindle amplifier setting
screen (15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details 
of the FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB spindle amplifier setting
screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1436 -
12.4.23.6 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen
(15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB
axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in 
the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64693EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.23.6 (a) FSSB axis setting screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.4.23.7 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen (15/19-inch 
display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
setting screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.7 (a) Servo setting screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1437 -
12.4.23.8 Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (15/19-inch display 
unit)
The spindle-related parameters can be displayed and modified.
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting) 
(15/19-inch display unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.8 (a) Parameter tuning screen (spindle setting) (15-inch display unit)
12.4.23.9 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) (15/19-inch


key: chroma:document
string_value:
display unit)
The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting
and spindle tuning screens can be displayed and modified. Moreover, the parameters can be initialized to 
the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting) 
(15/19-inch display unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.9 (a) Parameter tuning screen (Miscellaneous setting) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1438 -
12.4.23.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15/19-inch 
display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.10 (a) Servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit)
12.4.23.11 Displaying and setting the spindle tuning screen
(15/19-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the spindle tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the spindle
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Spindle Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.11 (a) Spindle tuning screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1439 -
12.4.23.12 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning
screen (15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of 
the machining parameter tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Machining Parameter Tuning (15/19-inch 
Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.23.12 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Parameters displayed for parameter tuning
Table 12.4.23.12 (a) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (1)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
SYSTEM
SETTING
System
setting
981 Sets the path of each axis.
982 Sets the path of each spindle.
983 Sets the T series/M series of each path. 
0:T series / 1:M series
3021 Sets the G/F signal address of each axis. *1
3022 Sets the G/F signal address of each spindle. *2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3006#0 GDC The deceleration signal for reference position return is:
0:X signal / 1:G signal
1
3008#2 XSG The signal address allocated to address X is: 
0:Fixed / 1:Set by the parameter
1
3013 Address allocated to the deceleration signal for 
reference position return
*3
3014 Bit position allocated to the deceleration signal for 
reference position return
*4
*1 : When intra-path axis number ≤ 8, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path axis number - 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When intra-path axis number ≥ 9, no standard value is available.
Example) When path 1 has 9 axes, and path 2 has 3 axes:
0,1,...,7,(none) for axes of path 1, 10,11,12 for axes of path 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1440 -
*2 : When intra-path spindle number ≤ 4, (path number - 1)*10+(intra-path spindle number - 1)
When intra-path spindle number ≥ 5, no standard value is available. 
Example) When path 1 has 5 spindles, and path 2 has 1 spindle:
0,1,...,4,(none) for spindles of path 1, 10 for spindle of path 2
*3 : When (path number ≤ 3) and (intra-path axis number ≤ 8)
Axes of path 1: 9
Axes of path 2: 7
Axes of path 3: 10


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 12.4.23.12 (b) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (2)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
SPINDLE
SETTING
Spindle
setting
3716#0 A/S Sets the type of spindle motor: 
0:Analaog / 1:Serial.
3717 Sets a motor number to be assigned to each 
spindle.
3706#4 GTT Specifies a spindle gear selection method.
0:M type / 1:T type
3718 Sets a suffix to be added to spindle speed display
on a screen such as the position display screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3735 Sets the minimum clamp speed of the spindle
motor.
3736 Sets the maximum clamp speed of the spindle
motor.
3741 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 1.
3742 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 2.
3743 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 3.
3744 Sets the maximum spindle speed for gear 4.
3772 Sets the maximum speed of the spindle.
When 0 is set, the speed is not clamped.
4133 Sets the motor model code of the serial spindle.
(This setting is not required for an analog spindle.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4019#7 *** The parameters for the serial spindle are:
0:Not automatically set/1:Automatically set
(This setting is not required for an analog spindle.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1441 -
Table 12.4.23.12 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (3)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
AXIS
SETTING
Basic 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes:
0:Metric (millimeter machine) / 1:Inch (inch machine)
1005#0 ZRNx When an automatic operation (other than G28) is 
executed before reference position return:
0:Alarm is issued (PS0224) / 1:No alarm is issued.
0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0:Not established / 1:Established
1815#5 APCx The position detector used is: 
0:Other than an absolute-position detector / 
1:Absolute-position detector
1825 Servo loop gain
1826 Effective area
1828 Positional deviation limit during travel
1829 Positional deviation limit during stop 500
*1 : For the M series: 88(X),89(Y),90(Z) sequentially starting with the first axis (no standard value for the 
fourth axis and up)
For the T series: 88(X),90(Z) (no standard value for the third axis and up)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1442 -
Table 12.4.23.12 (d) Parameters displayed for parameter tuning (4)
Menu Group Parameter 
No. Name Brief description Standard
setting
AXIS
SETTING
Coordinate 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference 
position
1241 Machine coordinate of the second reference 
position
1260 Amount of travel per revolution of a rotary axis 360.000
1320 Coordinate of the boundary of stored stroke 
check 1 in the positive direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1321 Coordinate of the boundary of stored stroke 
check 1 in the negative direction
Feedrate 1401#6 RDR For a rapid traverse command, dry run is:
0:Disabled / 1:Enabled
0
1410 Dry run feedrate
1420 Rapid traverse rate
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
1423 Jog feedrate
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate
1425 FL feedrate for reference position return
1428 Reference position return feedrate
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate
Accelera tion/
deceleration


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Accelera tion/
deceleration
1610#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry 
run during cutting feed:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is 
applied / 
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after 
interpolation is applied
1610#4 JGLx Acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration / 
1: Same as acceleration/deceleration for 
cutting feed (The settings of bit 1 (CTBx) 
and bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610
are followed.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
are followed.)
1620 Time constant for linear
acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for 
cutting feed
1623 FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after 
interpolation for cutting feed
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for 
jog feed
1625 FL feedrate for exponential 
acceleration/deceleration for jog feed
MISCELLANY MISC 3030 Allowable number of digits of an M code 3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3111#0 SVS The servo setting screen is: 0:Not displayed / 
1:Displayed
1
3111#1 SPS The spindle setting screen is: 0:Not 
displayed / 1:Displayed
1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1443 -
12.4.24 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit 
and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting 
down the life time, the life of the consumable can be counted down in the appropriate method set for the 
consumable, and the remaining life time can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(in case of multi-path system) are set.
Machine menu screen : The names of consumables in the machine can be registered.
NC menu screen : The names of consumables in the NC are already registered.
Using periodic maintenance screens
(1) Referencing a periodic maintenance screen
Display the status screen. For the meanings of items on the status screen, see Item, “Status screen”.
(2) Adding the name of a new consumable item to a periodic maintenance screen or editing an existing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
consumable item on the screen
The name of a consumable item can be added or edited on the machine menu screen. For details, see 
Item, “Machine menu screen”.
(3) Adding or editing a life time, remaining time, and a method of counting down the remaining time for 
a consumable on a periodic maintenance screen
A life time and remaining time can be added or edited on the setting screen. For details, see Item, 
“Setting screen”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“Setting screen”.
(4) Newly displaying the item name and remaining time of a consumable on a periodic maintenance 
screen.
1 Setting an item name
Select the item name of a consumable to be displayed from the machine menu screen or NC 
menu screen, or enter the name using the MDI keys. For the procedure, see Item, “Item name”
in “Status screen”.
2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type
Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1444 -
Procedure for displaying a periodic maintenance screen
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display [PERIOD MAINTE].
3 Press vertical soft key [PERIOD MAINTE] to display the periodic maintenance screen.
Status screen
When vertical soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the 
item names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.4.24 (a) Status screen (15-inch display unit)
- Item name
As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item 
name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter the name using 
the MDI keys.
Setting an item name from a menu screen
1 On the status screen, move the cursor to the name of the item to be set, and press horizontal soft key 
[ENTRY].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[ENTRY].
2 Press vertical soft key [MACHINE] or [NC] to display the machine menu screen or NC menu 
screen.
3 Move the cursor to an item name registered on the menu screen, and press horizontal soft key 
[SELECT] then [EXEC] successively.
4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is 
added to the status screen.
Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
advance. For the registration method, see the description of the procedure for registering item names on 
the machine menu screen.
Setting an item name using the MDI keys
1 Type the alphanumeric characters to be input, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
2 The entered item name is registered on the status screen.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed instead of horizontal soft key [INPUT], the entered 
characters can be added to an existing item name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1445 -
When typing 2-byte characters, type "*" before and after the character codes. The 2-byte character codes 
must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters 
only; or it must be up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example: To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In 
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte 
characters is registered, the warning "DATA OUT OF RANGE" may be output.
Deleting an item name
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press horizontal soft key [ERASE],


key: chroma:document
string_value:
then press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, its life time, remaining time, and count type are deleted at the same time.
- Remaining time
As the remaining time, the period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down 
operation is displayed.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached to the value (%) specified by 
parameter No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Setting the remaining time
1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item 
name must have been set in advance).
2 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE]. 
3 The screen display changes to the setting screen.
4 Set the life time, remaining time, and count type. For the setting method and other information, see 
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1446 -
Setting screen
On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, and count type of a managed consumable are set.
Fig. 12.4.24 (b) Setting screen (15-inch display unit)
Display procedure
1 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE]. 
- Life time
Set the life time of a consumable.
Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
key). The life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time.
At this time, "------" is indicated in the count type field.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the life time already set. 
The same value as the added value is added also to the remaining time.
A value ranging from 0 to 65535 (in hours) can be set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name is not registered, the 
warning "EDIT REJECTED" is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 If a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning "DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE" is issued.
3 If horizontal soft keys [ERASE] and [TYPE] is pressed, the warning "EDIT 
REJECTED" is issued.
- Remaining time
The period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down operation is indicated.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached the value (%) specified by parameter
No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press 
horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the remaining time 
already set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1447 -
A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set.
When horizontal soft key [ERASE] then horizontal soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the 
life time is set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not 
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT 
OF RANGE” is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OF RANGE” is issued.
3 If horizontal soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is 
issued.
- Count type
As the count type, select the way of counting.
Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press horizontal soft key [TYPE]. 
Count types are displayed as horizontal soft keys as shown below. Select one of these horizontal soft keys, 
then press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
Horizontal soft key Meaning Indication


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[NO CNT] Counting is not performed (stopped) — — — — — —
[ALL] Counting is performed at all times All times
[POWER ON] Counting is performed when power is on. When power is on
[RUN] Counting is performed when operation is in progress. When operation is in progress
[CUT] Counting is performed when cutting is being performed. When cutting is being performed
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not 
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Horizontal soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] have no effect.
3 When counting is performed at all times, a 24-hour error is generated in leap 
year.
4 If horizontal soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is 
issued.
- Path number
When [RUN] or [CUT] is set to the count type in multi path, path number can be set.
Make the cursor to the count type of a target registration number, then input path number and press soft 
key [INPUT].
The setting range is 0-(max path number).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the specified path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
If 0 is set, when either of path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
NOTE
1 If [NO CNT], [ALL] or [POWER ON] is set to count type, “--” is displayed. In this 
case, if the setting is operated, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 If the setting is beyond the valid data range, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF 
RANGE” is issued.
3 If soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. The 
soft key [+INPUT] is invalid.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1448 -
Registration from a program
The item name, life time, remaining time, count type and path number can be registered in the status 
screen and the setting screen by executing the program of the following format.
Format
G10 L60 Px [n] Aa Rr Qpt
X : Registration number
n : Item name, format: 
[alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
a : life time
r : remaining time
p : path number
t : count type


key: chroma:document
string_value:
t : count type
The meaning of the value of the count type is as follow.
0 : NO COUNT
1 : ALL TIMES
2 : POWER ON
3 : RUNNING
4 : CUTTING
The range of the path number is 0 – (max path number).
EX.)
Q24 : The path number is 2, and the count type is “CUTTING”
Q103 : The path number is 10, and the count type is “RUNNING”
Machine menu screen
On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the 
description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.24 (c) Machine menu screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1449 -
- Displaying the screen
1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [MACHINE].
On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods:
• Registration from a program
• Registration using the MDI keys
- Registration from a program
By executing a program having the following format, an item name can be registered in the menu of the 
machine:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]
X Registration number
n Item name, format: 
[alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
- Registration using the MDI keys
An item name can be registered on the menu screen of the machine by typing the item name in the format 
shown below on the machine menu screen, then pressing horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the key).
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the typed characters can be added to an already registered 
item name.
Format


key: chroma:document
string_value:
item name.
Format
Alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters
Two-byte codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER 
CODE TABLE".)
When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to 
be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be 
up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example:
To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In 
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte 
characters is registered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” may be output.
3 When a blank item name is selected on the machine screen, the warning “EDIT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
REJECTED” is issued.
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press horizontal soft key [ERASE], 
then press horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1450 -
NC menu screen
From this screen, an item name can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to 
the status screen, see the description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.24 (d) NC menu screen (15-inch display unit)
- Displaying the screen
1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [NC].
NOTE
On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be 
performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performed.
When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set.
12.4.25 System Configuration Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software.
Procedure for displaying the screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key , then press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until vertical 
soft key [SYSTEM] is displayed.
2 Press vertical soft key [SYSTEM]. The system configuration screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
There are two types of system configuration screens: the hardware configuration screen and the software 
configuration screen. The screen display can switch between these screens by using and . 
When vertical soft key [SERVO INFO] or [SPINDLE INFO] is pressed, information about the connected 
servo system or spindles is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1451 -
Fig. 12.4.25 (a) System configuration screen (15-inch display unit)
Hardware configuration screen
This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.25 (b) Hardware configuration screen
Software configuration screen
This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.25 (c) Software configuration screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1452 -
Servo information screen
When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo 
motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen
1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [SERVO INFO].
2 The servo information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.25 (d) Servo information screen
Spindle information screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Spindle information screen
When a spindle system is connected to the NC, the ID information of the connected spindle devices 
(spindle motors and spindle amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen
1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [SPINDLE INFO].
2 The spindle information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.25 (e) Spindle information screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1453 -
12.4.26 Power Consumption Monitoring Screen (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)
The electric power data of servo axis and spindle axis consumption and regeneration can be displayed.
Display of power consumption monitoring screen
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [POWER MONIT] appears.
3 Press soft key [POWER MONIT].
Fig. 12.4.26 (a) Power consumption monitoring screen for 15” display unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Operation of power consumption monitoring screen
Switch of display axis
When information on all axes is not displayed, the page is switched with the MDI key or .
Clear cumulative power consumption value
1 Press horizontal soft key [TOTAL CLEAR].
Horizontal Soft key [EXEC] and [CAN] appear.
2 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
Cumulative power consumption and cumulative time start from 0.
To quit clear operation, press horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1454 -
Explanation
TIME
Integrating time of power consumption is displayed.
Axis name
Axis name of servo and spindle is displayed. "ALL" means the total of all servo and spindle axes.
CONSUMP
Integral power consumption is displayed.
REGEN
Integral power regeneration is displayed.
NET
Integral net amount of power consumption is displayed. 
The net amount of power consumption = power consumption – power regeneration.
PRESENT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PRESENT
Present net power consumption is displayed. A negative value is displayed about the net power 
consumption while the power is regenerating like the axis is decelerating, etc.
Bar-graph of PRESENT
Present net power consumption is displayed as a bar-graph.
The scale of bar-graph can be specified in the parameter (No.11392 in case of the servo, No.11393 in case 
of the spindle).
The scale of the entire power consumption bar-graph can be specified in the parameter No.11371.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The bar expands from the center to right while consuming the electric power. The bar expands from the 
center to left while regenerating the electric power.
Unit of data
When the cumulative power consumption value can no longer be displayed in kWh, unit of data is 
switched to MWh automatically


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1455 -
12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 
By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, alarm history, external operator message, and 
external operator message history data can be displayed.
For details of alarms and alarm history, see Sections, “ALARM DISPLAY” and “ALARM HISTORY 
DISPLAY”. Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for the external message display.
12.5.1 External Operator Message History


key: chroma:document
string_value:
External operator message can be stored as history. And, stored history can be seen on the external 
operator message history screen.
Screen display
To display the external operator message history screen, set bit 2 (OMH) of parameter No. 3112 to 1.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [MESSAGE HISTRY]. The external operator message history screen is displayed.
3 The screen display can be changed to the previous page and the next page by using page keys
and .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and .
Erasing history data from the external operator message history screen
Procedure
1 Display the external operator message history screen.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
3 Press soft key [CLEAR]. The external operator message history data is then erased.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1456 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 HMC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history:
0: Cannot be erased.
1: Can be erased.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Can be erased.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is 
set to 1.
#6 MS0
#7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be 
preserved in the external operator message history.
Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages
MS0=0 MS1=0 255 8
MS0=1 MS1=0 200 10
MS0=0 MS1=1 100 18
MS0=1 MS1=1 50 32
NOTE
1 Although up to 255 characters can be specified for each external


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operator message, you can use the combination of bits 6 (MS0) 
and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 to limit the number of 
characters and select the number of messages to be preserved in 
the external operator message history.
2 The settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 
take effect the next time the power is turned on. The external 
operator message history is erased at that time.
3 Even though you change the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of parameter No. 3113, the alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE 
OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again 
before the new settings can take effect.
4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered 
in character code, the number of characters recorded in the 
external operator message history may be smaller than the 
maximum number of characters set by bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of 
parameter No. 3113.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1457 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HOM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages and macro messages #3006 is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 SOH SAH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be 
turned off before operation is continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#2 SAH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to non-alarm history, alarm 
history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Erased, except the most recent 50 items of history data.
#3 SOH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to data other than external 
operator message history, external operator message history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Retained.
When this parameter is set to 1, the number of retained external operator message history


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is determined by the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113.
NOTE
1 The settings of bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 and bit 3 (SOH) 
of parameter No. 11354 will be effective the next time the power is 
turned on. At this time, all history data (operation history, alarm 
history, and external operator message history) will be erased.
2 With the settings of bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 and bit 3 
(SOH) of parameter No. 11354, the number of history data items


key: chroma:document
string_value:
that can be retained varies. The number of history data items that 
can be recorded as follows:
SAH=0, SOH=0 . . . Approx. 8000 items
SAH=1, SOH=0 . . . Approx. 7400 items
SAH=0, SOH=1 . . . Approx. 7500 items
SAH=1, SOH=1 . . . Approx. 6900 items
(*) The numbers of items above are those if only key operation 
history is recorded.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1458 -
12.6 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND 
SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION
Overview
In a multi-path system, the screen can be switched between simultaneous multi-path display and 
single-path display by soft key operation.
This function allows easy switching between the single-path display which contains much information 
and the simultaneous multi-path display which enables multiple path information to be checked at a time.
Details


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Details 
The screen can be switched between the simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display by soft 
key operation.
In the single-path display, the screen for the path selected by the path selection signal is displayed.
In the simultaneous multi-path display, the screen for the simultaneous display path group including the 
path selected by the path selection signal is displayed.
This function is enabled with the following screens which can display information of multiple paths


key: chroma:document
string_value:
simultaneously when bit 3 (MTS) of parameter No. 11355 is 1.
• Actual position display screen
(Absolute position display screen, relative position display screen, overall position display screen)
• Program check screen
• Tool path graphic screen
• Program edit screen
NOTE
For the setting of the simultaneous multi-path display, refer to the description of 
parameters Nos. 13131 and 13132 in the Parameter Manual (B-64700EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1459 -
Procedure (10.4-inch display unit)
The procedure is explained using the current position display screen as an example.
1 Press function key .
Actual position screen (multi-path simultaneous display) appears.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press continuous menu key until soft key [SINGLE PATH] appears.
4 Press soft key [SINGLE PATH].
The single-path display appears as shown below:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1460 -
Procedure (15/19-inch display unit)
The procedure is explained using the current position display screen as an example.
1 Press function key .
Actual position screen (multi-path simultaneous display) appears.
2 Press horizontal soft key [SINGLE PATH].
The single-path display appears as shown below:
3 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1461 -
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11355 MTS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#3 MTS The function for switching between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path 
display is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 PGR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 PGR When the path select signal is changed, the screen of the multi path simultaneous display 
group:
0: Is not switched.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
group:
0: Is not switched.
1: Is switched to the display group including the selected path.
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
This parameter sets a group for simultaneous display on one screen in a multi-path 
system.
The paths set to belong to the same group are displayed on one screen.
If the values for all paths are set to 0, the simultaneous multi-path display function is 
disabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
disabled.
NOTE
When specifying groups, specify group numbers not less than 1 
successively.
On 10.4-inch display unit, up to three paths can be specified for 
simultaneous display.
On a 15-inch and 19-inch display units, up to four paths can be 
specified for simultaneous display.
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of paths included in a simultaneous multi-path display group


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This parameter sets the display order of a path defined to belong to a simultaneous
multi-path display group.
Set the order, using numbers ranging from 1 to the number of paths included in the 
simultaneous multi-path display group.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1462 -
NOTE
Specify successive order numbers not less than 1 for the paths 
defined to belong to a group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6502 MPD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 MPD On tool path graphic screen, operation of starting, ending and erasing is effective to:
0: all paths.
1: selected path.
12.7 PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The path name expansion display function enlarges the path name displayed at the upper right of the 
screen, which makes easy to check the currently selected path.
Explanation
When this function is enabled, the items on the screen are displayed as follows:
• The path name displayed in the status area is enlarged and displayed at the upper right of the screen. 
Only the alphanumeric characters in an arbitrary path name are displayed when enlarged (see (1) in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.7 (a)). For the display colors, see the following paragraph.
• The O and N numbers are always displayed in small characters as shown in (2) in Fig. 12.7 (a).
The displayed program names consist of the following number of characters:
10.4-inch display unit: 17 characters (When a program number consists of more than 17 characters, 
the first 16 characters and a tilde (~) are displayed.)
15-inch display unit: 32 characters (Maximum number of characters of an arbitrary program name)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• The path name displayed in the status area is displayed as usual (see (3) in Fig. 12.7 (a)).
This function is enabled by setting bit 2 (PNE) of parameter No. 11350.
With all screens other than those for the C Language Executor and macro executor (conversational 
macro), this function is available.
Fig. 12.7 (a) Sample screen when the path name expansion display function is enabled (offset screen)
(3)
(2) (1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1463 -
Display character color
The following colors specified on the color setting screen are used for the enlarged display characters:
Character color: No. 3 color (title color)
Background color: No. 10 color (title background color)
The path name can be displayed in reverse video by setting bit 0 (PNI) of parameter No. 11352.
Table 12.7 (a) Enlarged display character colors and parameters
Character color Background color


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Bit 0 (PNI) of parameter 
No. 11352
0: A normal display No. 3 color No. 10 color
1: A reverse display No. 10 color No. 3 color
Fig. 12.7 (b) Character color numbers for the path name expansion display function
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11350 PNE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 PNE Path name expansion display function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is invalid if the number of paths is 1.
3 It is effective to 10.4/15/19-inch display units.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11352 PNI
No. 3 color No. 10 color


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1464 -
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 PNI The display by the path name enlarged display function is:
0: A normal display.
1: A reverse display.
NOTE
This parameter is effective to 10.4/15/19-inch display units.
3141 Path name (1st character)
3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)
3144 Path name (4th character)
3145 Path name (5th character)
3146 Path name (6th character)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3146 Path name (6th character)
3147 Path name (7th character)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and 
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series 
name.
NOTE
1 For characters and codes, see Appendix, “CHARACTER CODE 
LIST”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
LIST”.
2 When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, PATH1(,PATH2...) are 
displayed as path names.
3 When optional path name display is enlarged (with bit 2 (PNE) of 
parameter No. 11350 set to 1), only alphanumeric characters are 
displayed. If any other type of characters are set, spaces are 
displayed instead.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1465 -
12.8 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC 
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION
Overview
Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the 
life of the LCD.
To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a 
key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically


key: chroma:document
string_value:
when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.
Screen erasure function
When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any 
function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by 
pressing any function key.
Automatic screen erasure function
When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.
- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function
If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC
screen is erased.
Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen
• Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0
• None of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• No alarm is issued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• No alarm is issued.
- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function
If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed 
again:
Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen
• One of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• An alarm is issued.
- Screen erasure by using the key + function key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a 
function key.
- Set time
Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid.
- Alarm in another path
When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1466 -
Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Set time until a screen saver activated in minutes. This parameter is effective on path 1 
only.
NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen 
erasure is disabled.
12.9 LOAD METER SCREEN
Overview
The servo and spindle load meters can be displayed in place of the modal code display part and the 
remaining travel distance part of the current position display on the program check screen.
This function is enabled only when the 10.4-inch display unit is used.
12.9.1 Single-path Display
Screen layout


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Screen layout
In the single-path display mode, the servo or spindle load meter is displayed in place of the remaining 
travel distance display of the total position display.
Fig. 12.9.1 (a) Servo load meter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1467 -
Fig. 12.9.1 (b) Spindle load meter
Screen switching
The servo load meter and spindle load meter are displayed by pressing soft key [MONITOR] on the left 
side of the screen. Initially the servo load meter is displayed. Each time soft key [MONITOR] is pressed, 
the servo load meter and spindle load meter alternate.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1468 -
12.9.2 Two-path Display and Three-path Display
Screen layout
In the two- or three-path display mode, the modal information display part on the program check screen 
can be replaced by the servo or spindle load meter.
Fig. 12.9.2 (a) Servo load meter screen
Fig. 12.9.2 (b) Spindle load meter screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1469 -
Screen switching
By pressing soft key [LOAD METER], the screen display can be switched among the modal information 
display, servo load meter display, and spindle load meter display.
Modal information
 Press soft key [LOAD METER].
Spindle load meter
 Press soft key [LOAD METER].
Servo load meter
 Press soft key [LOAD METER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1470 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3192 PLD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 PLD When the current position is indicated for a path, and when the program check screen is 
displayed in a two- or three-path system, the function for displaying servo load meters 
and spindle load meters is :
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
13140 First character in spindle load meter display
13141 Second character in spindle load meter display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte spindle
[Valid data range] These parameters set character codes to set the name of each spindle that appears in 
spindle load meter display. Any character string consisting of numeric characters, 
alphabetical characters, katakana characters, and symbols with a maximum length of two 
characters can be displayed as a spindle name.
If 0 is set, the following is displayed:
1st spindle S1
2nd spindle S2
3rd spindle S3
4th spindle S4


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3rd spindle S3
4th spindle S4
12.10 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, 
SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING 
MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT 
OPERATION
The program number, program name, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on 
the screen except when the power is turned on, a system alarm occurs.
If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation and 
displays a warning message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displays a warning message.
This section describes the display of the program number, sequence number, and status, and warning 
messages displayed for incorrect data setting or input/output operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1471 -
Screens of a 10.4-inch display unit
12.10.1 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and 
Sequence Number
The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence 
number are indicated in the upper right part as shown below.
Fig. 12.10.1 (a) Program number and sequence number (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the EDIT mode, the number and name of the program currently edited in the foreground are indicated.
When 10.4-inch display unit is used, the program number that is displayed in the upper right of the screen 
is changed according to the digit of the program number.
When the program number is 4-digit or less, “O” plus a 4-digit numeric is displayed.
Fig. 12.10.1 (b) Program number is 4-digit or less
When the program number is 5-digit or more, “O” plus a 8-digit numeric is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1472 -
12.10.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or 
Input/Output Operation
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the 
second line from the bottom on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation 
condition of the system. If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the operation and a warning message is displayed on the third line from the bottom on the screen. This 
prevents invalid data setting and input/output errors.
Explanation
- Description of each display
Fig. 12.10.2 (a) Positions of status indications
(1) Current mode
MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
**** : Indicates a mode other than the above.
(2) Automatic operation status
**** : Reset (When the power is turned on or the state in which program execution has 
terminated and automatic operation has terminated.)
STOP : Automatic operation stop (The state in which one block has been executed and 
automatic operation is stopped.)
HOLD : Feed hold (The state in which execution of one block has been interrupted and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
automatic operation is stopped.)
STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system operates automatically)
MSTR : Tool retract and recover operation state (The state in which a recover operation and 
repositioning operation are being performed)
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status
MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving.
DWL : Indicates the dwell state.
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1473 -
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed
FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the 
complete signal from the PMC)
(5) Emergency stop or reset status
--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
-RESET- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(6) Alarm status
When plural alarm conditions occur at the same time, the highest priority alarm will be 
displayed when bit 0 (LNG) of parameter No. 8906 is set to 0. 
All alarms will be displayed per 1 second in order of the priority when the parameter LNG is set 
to 1.
Priority high
ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
APC : Indicates that the voltage of the backup battery of the absolute pulse coder has 
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BAT : Indicates that the voltage of the lithium battery (the backup battery of the CNC) has 
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
FAN : Indicates that the rotation speed of the fan has decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
Check the fan monitor screen and replace the fan motors for which the rotation speed 
is found to be decreased.
PMC : Indicates that a PMC alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MSG : Indicates that an operator message is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FSB : Indicates that FSSB cable has been degraded. (Blinks in reversed display.)
LKG : Indicates that the insulation resistance value of the motor or the power line has 
decreased.. (Blinks in reversed display.)
ENC : Indicates that a detector has been in abnormal status. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MNT : Indicates that a life warning of periodic maintenance function has been occurred. 
(Blinks in reversed display.)
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
Priority low
(7) Current time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Priority low
(7) Current time
hh : mm : ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
(8) Program editing status
INPUT : Indicates that data is being input.
OUTPUT : Indicates that data is being output.
SEARCH : Indicates that a search is being performed.
EDIT : Indicates that another editing operation is being performed (insertion, 
modification, etc.)
LSK : Indicates that labels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR : Indicates that the program is being restarted


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
OFST : Indicates that the tool length compensation amount measurement mode is set 
(for the machining center system) or that the tool length compensation amount 
write mode is set (for the lathe system).
WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount measurement mode is set.
AICC1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AICC2 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control II mode.
MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made.
WSFT : Indicates that the workpiece shift amount write mode is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1474 -
TWP : Indicates that operation is being performed in the tilted working plane indexing
mode.
Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed.
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation
When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.), when input is disabled (wrong 
mode, write disabled, etc.), or when input/output operation is incorrect (wrong mode, etc.), a warning


key: chroma:document
string_value:
message is displayed. When the RS-232C communication port is being used, “CANNOT USE I/O 
DEVICE” is displayed. In this case, the CNC does not accept the setting or input/output operation (retry 
the operation according to the message).
Example 1)
When a parameter is entered
Example 2)
When a parameter is entered
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
(10) Tool post name
The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PATH1 : Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1.
Other names can be used depending on the settings of parameters Nos. 3141 to 3147. The 
tool post name is displayed at the position where (8) is now displayed. While the program is 
edited, (8) is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1475 -
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit
12.10.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and 
Sequence Number (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence 
number are indicated in the upper right part as shown below.
Fig. 12.10.3 (a) Program number and sequence number (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the EDIT mode, the number and name of the program currently edited in the foreground are indicated.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1476 -
12.10.4 Displaying the Program Name
When bit 4 (DPC) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 0, the program name (comment) of main program is 
displayed between the screen title and O number.
Fig. 12.10.4 (a) Program name (15inch) 
A program name consisting of up to 18 characters can be displayed.
If a program name is longer than 18 characters, the first 17 characters are displayed. A tilde (~) is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed as the 18th character, which indicates that the program name is abbreviated.
Fig. 12.10.4 (b) Program name longer than 18 characters
Program name


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1477 -
12.10.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or 
Input/Output Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the 
next to last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the 
system. If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and a warning message is displayed on the next to last line of the screen. This prevents invalid data 
setting and input/output errors.
Explanation
- Description of each display
Fig. 12.10.5 (a) Positions of status indications
(1) Current mode
MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1478 -
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed
FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the 
complete signal from the PMC)
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
(5) Emergency stop or reset status
--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
-RESET- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FSB : Indicates that FSSB cable has been degraded. (Blinks in reversed display.)
LKG : Indicates that the insulation resistance value of the motor or the power line has 
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
ENC : Indicates that a detector has been in abnormal status. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MNT : Indicates that a life warning of periodic maintenance function has been occurred. 
(Blinks in reversed display.)
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
Priority low
(7) Current time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
OFST : Indicates that the tool length compensation amount measurement mode is set (for 
the machining center system) or that the tool length compensation amount write 
mode is set (for the lathe system).
WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount measurement mode is set.
AICC1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AICC2 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control II mode.
MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1479 -
WSFT : Indicates that the workpiece shift amount write mode is set.
TWP : Indicates that operation is being performed in the tilted working plane indexing
mode.
TOLCON : Indicates that operation is being performed in Tolerance control mode.
Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed.
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.), when input is disabled (wrong 
mode, write disabled, etc.), or when input/output operation is incorrect (wrong mode, etc.), a warning 
message is displayed. When the RS-232C communication port is being used, “CANNOT USE I/O 
DEVICE” is displayed. In this case, the CNC does not accept the setting or input/output operation (retry 
the operation according to the message).
Example 1)
When a parameter is entered
Example 2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example 2)
When a parameter is entered
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
(10) Tool post name 
The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed.
PATH1 : Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1.
Other names can be used depending on the settings of parameters Nos. 3141 to 3147. The tool 
post name is displayed at the position where (8) is now displayed. While the program is edited, 
(8) is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1480 -
12.11 CALCULATION KEY FUNCTION
12.11.1 Overview
Calculating formula input to key-in buffer is calculated by pressing calculation key + .
12.11.2 Operation
- Calculation of one calculating formula
(1) Calculating formula input to key-in buffer.
(2) Calculation key + is pressed.
(3) Calculation result becomes the content of the key-in buffer.
- Calculation of two or more calculating formulas


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Two or more calculating formulas can be input by delimiting calculating formula with EOB, and each 
calculating formula is calculated. 
Moreover, the same operation as EOB is performed when delimiting calculating formula with an alphabet 
or special characters other than the function name.
(Example)
100.0/2;200.0/2;300.0/2_ → 50.0;100.0;150.0_
X350.0*3Y120.0/5;X20.0*3.5;_ → X1050.0Y24.0;X70.0;_
12.11.3 Details
- Type of numerical value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Type of numerical value
There are two about the integer type and the real number type.
(1) Integer type: Only the numerical value from 0 to 9.
(Example) 10735
(2) Real number type: Numerical value that contains decimal point.
(Example) 10.23
- Calculation result
(1) Calculation result of the integer type and the real number type becomes a real number type.
(2) Calculation result is converted into the character string within the following ranges. In case of real


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number type, a value that is smaller than minimum value is rounded off.
Integer type: -999999999 to 999999999
Real number type: -999999999.0 to -0.000000001
0.0
0.000000001 to 999999999.0
- Calculating formula that can be used
(1) Arithmetic operator +, -, *, /
(2) Parentheses [ , ]
(3) Function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1481 -
Table 12.12.3 Function that can be used by calculation function
Function name Type Explanation
SIN Real number type Sine（in degrees）
COS Real number type Cosine（in degrees）
TAN Real number type Tangent（in degrees）
ASIN Real number type Arc sine
ACOS Real number type Arc cosine
ATAN Real number type Arc tangent（two arguments）
SQRT Real number type Square root
ABS Real number type Absolute value
LN Real number type Natural logarithm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
EXP Real number type Exponent using base e (2.718...)
Arc tangent
ATAN is described as follows.
ATAN[formula 1]/[formula 2]
(Example)
ATAN[0]/[1] → 0.0
ATAN[1]/[0] → 90.0
ATAN[1]/[1] → 45.0
ATAN[-1]/[-1] → 1350.0
- Priority of calculation
(1) Function ＞ Multiplication type calculation ＞ addition type calculation
(2) The priority of calculation can be changed by parentheses.
(Example)
SIN [ [ [ 10 + 15 ] * 0.1 + 0.5 ] * 10 ]
 
The result of (4) becomes the argument of SIN.
- Warning


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Warning
The following warning messages are displayed, when an error occurs by operating calculation key 
function.
Warning message Cause
FORMAT ERROR The format of the calculation formula is not correct. 
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The calculation result is out of range.
X=formula 2
Y=formula 1
Calculation sequence
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1482 -
- Limitation
Calculation function cannot be used on the following screen.
- Conversational macro
- C Language Executor
- FANUC PICTURE
- MANUAL GUIDE i


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1483 -
13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION
13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY
The graphic display functions enable drawing of the tool path of the program currently used for 
machining.
These functions are intended to display the movement of the tool during automatic operation or during 
manual operation.
This enables the operator to check the progress of machining and the current tool position.
These functions include the following:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The current tool position in the workpiece coordinate system is displayed.
- Graphic coordinates can be set freely.
- Rapid traverse and cutting feed can be drawn using a different color for each.
- The values of F, S, and T in the program during drawing are displayed.
- Graphic enlargement or reduction is possible.
Graphic display procedure
Explanation
Press the function key then press the [GRAPH] soft key to display the tool path graphic screen.
- Tool path graphic screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tool path graphic screen
The tool path graphic screen consists of three major areas:
- Graphic area for drawing a tool path
- Area for displaying machining information such as tool position information 
- Area for displaying a graphic coordinate system
Fig. 13.1 (a) Tool path graphic screen (M series)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1484 -
Fig. 13.1 (b) Tool path graphic screen (T series)
- Tool path
In a graphic coordinate system set by the graphic parameters described later, a tool path in the workpiece
coordinate system is drawn.
Even when the tool position changes discontinuously for a cause such as the setting of the origin and the 
switching of the workpiece coordinate system, drawing is performed assuming that the tool has moved.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A tool path is continuously drawn even when the screen display is changed to another screen.
- Machining information
On the right side of the screen, the positions (along only three axes used for drawing) in the workpiece
coordinate system, feedrate (F), spindle speed (S), and tool number (T) are displayed.
NOTE
Up to three graphic axes are used with the M series, and up to two graphic axes
are used with the T series.
- Graphic coordinate system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Graphic coordinate system
On the lower-right portion of the screen, the coordinate axes and axis names of the graphic coordinate
system are displayed.
Graphic parameter screen
Explanation
Press the function key then press the [PARAM] soft key to display the tool path graphic screen.
On the graphic parameter screen, make settings necessary for drawing a tool path.
The graphic parameter screen consists of three pages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1485 -
M
- Graphic parameter screen page 1
Fig. 13.1 (c) Graphic parameter screen page 1
On graphic parameter screen page 1, a graphic coordinate system, graphic range, and so forth are set.
In the setting of a graphic coordinate system, the coordinate axes and axis names of the set coordinate
system are graphically displayed. When a 3-dimensional coordinate system is displayed, a rotation angle 
is also displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is also displayed.
A graphic range is set using one of two methods. One method sets a graphic scale and graphic center 
coordinates. The other sets the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range.
- Graphic parameter screen page 2
Fig. 13.1 (d) Graphic parameter screen page 2
On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors, rotation angles, and whether to perform automatic
erase operation are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1486 -
- Graphic parameter screen page 3
Fig. 13.1 (e) Graphic parameter screen page 3
On graphic parameter screen page 3, coordinate axes to be used for drawing are set.
T
- Graphic parameter screen page 1
Fig. 13.1 (f) Graphic parameter screen page 1
On graphic parameter screen page 1, a graphic coordinate system, graphic range, and so forth are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the setting of a graphic coordinate system, the coordinate axes and axis names of the set coordinate
system are graphically displayed. When a 3-dimensional coordinate system is displayed, a rotation angle 
is also displayed.
A graphic range is set using one of two methods. One method sets a graphic scale and graphic center 
coordinates. The other sets the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1487 -
- Graphic parameter screen page 2
Fig. 13.1 (g) Graphic parameter screen page 2 (T series)
On graphic parameter screen page 2, graphic colors and whether to perform automatic erase operation are 
set.
- Graphic parameter screen page 3
Fig. 13.1 (h) Graphic parameter screen page 3
On graphic parameter screen page 3, coordinate axes to be used for drawing are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1488 -
Graphic parameter setting
Explanation
For tool path drawing, a graphic coordinate system, tool path graphic colors, and graphic range need to be 
set on the graphic parameter screen.
The graphic parameters to be set on the graphic parameter screen are described below.
When a value is set for a parameter, the parameter value becomes immediately effective. If a tool path is 
already drawn, the tool path is cleared when new parameter values are set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Graphic coordinate system
Select a desired graphic coordinate system for tool path drawing then set the corresponding number.
M
Y
X
0. XY Z
Y
1. YZ Y
Z
2. ZY
Z
X
3. XZ Z 4. XYZ
X Y
Y 5. ZXY
Z X
Fig. 13.1 (i) Graphic coordinate system (M series)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1489 -
T
Setting = 0 Setting = 1 Setting = 2 Setting = 3
Setting = 4 Setting = 5 Setting = 6 Setting = 7
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Setting = 8
Z
X
Setting = 9
X
Z
Setting = 10 Setting = 11
Z
Z
X
X
Setting = 12 Setting = 13 Setting = 14 Setting = 15
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
Fig. 13.1 (j) Graphic coordinate system (T series)
M
- Horizontal rotation angle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M
- Horizontal rotation angle
When a 3-dimensional graphic coordinate system such as 4.XYZ or 5.ZXY is selected, the coordinate
system can be rotated with the horizontal plane used as the rotation plane. Set a rotation angle from -360°
to +360°.
The initial rotation angle can be set with parameter No. 24831, and the actual rotation angle is equal to 
the "initial rotation angle + specified rotation angle".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In Fig. 13.1 (k) below, the graphic coordinate system XYZ is converted to X”Y”Z” by the following
settings:
Initial rotation angle: 180°
Horizontal rotation angle: 30°


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1490 -
X Y
Z
180°
Y' X'
X"
Y"
Horizontal
rotation plane
30°
Fig. 13.1 (k) Coordinate system rotation in horizontal direction
- Vertical rotation angle
When a 3-dimensional coordinate system such as 4.XYZ or 5.ZXY is selected, the coordinate system can 
be rotated with an axis on the horizontal plane specified as a vertical rotation axis. Set a rotation angle 
from -360° to +360°.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
from -360° to +360°.
A vertical rotation axis can be set with the angle with the horizontal axis of the screen on the horizontal 
plane. This angle can be set with parameter No. 24832.
In Fig. 13.1 (l) below, the graphic coordinate system XYZ is converted to X'Y'Z' by the following
settings:
Rotation angle of the vertical rotation axis: 65°
Vertical rotation angle: 20°
X Y
Z
X'
Z'
Vertical rotation axis
rotation plane
Initial vertical
rotation axis
Vertical rotation 
plane 20°
65°
Y'


key: chroma:document
string_value:
plane 20°
65°
Y'
Vertical rotation
axis
Fig. 13.1 (l) Coordinate system rotation in vertical direction
- Graphic color
Set a graphic color number for a tool path for each of cutting feed and rapid traverse.
1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Sky blue, 7: White
- Graphic range setting
Set a graphic range so that a tool path can be drawn in the tool path graphic area. Two methods are 
available:
1. Method that sets graphic center coordinates and a scale


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. Method that sets the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range
Whether method 1 or method 2 is used is determined by which parameters were set most recently. A set 
graphic range is preserved even if the power is turned off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1491 -
1. Method that sets graphic center coordinates and a scale
Set the coordinates of the center of a tool path graphic area in the workpiece coordinate system. Then, set 
a scale used to contain the graphic range in the tool path graphic area.
Set a scale value from 0.01 to 100 (magnification).
As a smaller scale is set, a tool path can be drawn in a wider range. As a larger scale is set, a tool path is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawn by enlarging the tool path around the graphic center coordinates.
2. Method that sets the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic
range
Set the maximum coordinates and minimum coordinates of a desired graphic range in the workpiece
coordinate system. Drawing is performed so that the specified entire range is contained in the tool path 
graphic area.
From set maximum values and minimum values, graphic center coordinates and a sale are automatically


key: chroma:document
string_value:
calculated to update the graphic center coordinates and scale on the graphic parameter screen.
When a scale is automatically determined, the scale is clamped to within the range 0.01 to 100. Moreover, 
a maximum value must be greater than the corresponding minimum value.
NOTE
When the maximum values and minimum values of a graphic range are set, the 
graphic center coordinates and scale are automatically updated. However, when


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the graphic center coordinates and scale are changed, the maximum values and 
minimum values of the graphic range are not automatically updated.
- Automatic erasure
Before drawing is started, the previous drawing can be erased automatically.
1: Immediately before drawing is started, the previous drawing is erased automatically.
0: The previous drawing is not erased automatically.
- Graphic axis number
Set which controlled axis to be assigned to which graphic axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For each controlled axis, set one of the following graphic axis numbers:
First graphic axis: 1
Second graphic axis: 2
Third graphic axis: 3
Axis not used for drawing: 0
NOTE
1 When 0 is set for all controlled axes, it is assumed that 1, 2, and 3 are set 
sequentially for the first to the third controlled axes.
2 With the T series, a tool path is drawn along the first and second graphic axes. 
No tool path is drawn along the third graphic axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1492 -
Operation for graphic parameter setting
Operation
- Moving the cursor
The cursor can be moved to a desired parameter by the page key or and the cursor key 
, , , or .
With the cursor keys, however, you cannot move from page 1 or 2 to page 3.
- Input of settings (absolute input)
Method 1
(1) Key in a value to be set.
(2) Press the [INPUT] soft key.
Method 2
(1) Key in a value to be set.
(2) Press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) Press the key.
- Input of settings (incremental input)
Method 1
(1) Key in a value to be incremented to or decremented from the current setting.
(2) Press the [+INPUT] soft key.
Procedure for tool path drawing
Procedure
- Start of drawing
(1) Display the tool path graphic screen.
(2) Press the [START] soft key.
The state that enables the movement of the tool in automatic operation or manual operation to be 
drawn is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawn is set.
Afterwards, tool path drawing continues even if another screen is displayed.
(3) Start automatic operation or manual operation.
- End of drawing
(1) Display the tool path graphic screen.
(2) Press the [END] soft key.
Tool path drawing ends.
- Erasure of the drawing
(1) Press the [END] soft key to end drawing.
(2) Press the [CLEAR] soft key. The tool path drawn so far is erased.
NOTE
1 Set the machine lock state to perform drawing only without moving the tool.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When the feedrate is high, the tool path may not be drawn correctly. In such a 
case, decrease the feedrate by performing, for example, a dry run.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1493 -
Enlarged/reduced display
On the tool path graphic screen, you can move the center position of the tool path drawing or enlarge the 
tool path drawing while viewing the drawn tool path.
If any of these operations is executed, the tool path already drawn is cleared.
- Procedure for changing the graphic range by setting a graphic center and 
magnification


key: chroma:document
string_value:
magnification
The center position of drawing can be moved. At the same time, the scale can also be changed. So, the 
tool path can be enlarged or reduced at a desired new center position.
(1) Press the [SCALE] soft key then the [CENTER] soft key.
A yellow cursor appears at the center of the screen, and the soft key display is changed.
(2) Move the yellow cursor to a new graphic center position by using the cursor key , , 
, or .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
, or .
(3) When changing the scale, key in a value from 0.01 to 100 (magnification) then press the [INPUT] 
soft key. An input value is displayed at "SCALE" in the lower-right corner of the screen.
When you press the [+INPUT] soft key, the current magnification is incremented by an input value.
(4) Press the [EXEC] soft key to end the operation.
After this step, the setting for graphic movement is effective to enable drawing with the new setting.
Before graphic movement After graphic movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 13.1 (m) Graphic movement (magnification = 2.00)
- Procedure for changing the graphic range with a rectangle
A tool path can be drawn by enlarging a specified rectangular area.
(1) Press the [SCALE] soft key then the [RECTANGLE] soft key.
Two cursors, one in red and the other in yellow, appear at the center of the screen, and the soft key
display is changed.
(2) Move the yellow cursor by using the cursor key , , , or . The cursor to be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
moved can be switched by pressing the [CURSOR UP/DOWN] soft key.
Move the two cursors to the diagonal points of a new rectangular graphic range. A tool path is drawn
next time so that the drawn tool path is contained in this rectangular range.
(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to end the operation.
After this step, the setting of graphic enlargement is effective to enable drawing with the new 
setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1494 -
Before graphic enlargement After graphic enlargement
Fig. 13.1 (n) Graphic enlargement
NOTE
1 To stop an enlargement/reduction operation, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
2 Even if you perform an enlargement/reduction operation, the tool path already 
drawn on the screen is neither moved nor enlarged. The setting for 
enlargement/reduction becomes effective starting with tool path drawing after 
you press the [EXEC] soft key.
Limitation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Limitation
In case of the setting in which coordinate system excluding the amount of travel based on cutter 
compensation and tool nose radius compensation is displayed (Bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No.3104 is set 
to 1), compensated tool path by cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation can't be drawn.
Set bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No.3104 to 0 to display coordinate system not excluding the amount of 
travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Use of this function with other functions
When virtual MDI key is enabled, this function cannot be used.
13.2 DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
Overview
The dynamic graphic display function has two features:
- Path Drawing
The path of coordinates specified in a program is drawn on the screen.
By displaying a travel path on the screen, the path can be checked easily before performing 
machining actually.
- Animation
The figure of a workpiece to be machined by a programmed tool movement is drawn.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
By drawing the 3-dimensional figure of a workpiece to be machined in an animation-like way, the 
intermediate machining process and final figure can be grasped easily.
When machining is performed according to a program, this function can draw a tool path with another 
program.
This function performs drawing much faster than the graphic display function based on automatic
operation, so that a program check can be made more swiftly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function is distinguished from automatic program operation as indicated by the following
terminology:
Automatic operation Operation performed for actual machining
Background operation Virtual operation performed for drawing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1495 -
13.2.1 Path Drawing
Overview
The following tool path drawing screens are used to make various settings and execute drawing:
- GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen
This screen is used to set data needed for tool path drawing.
- PATH GRAPHIC screen
This screen is used for tool path drawing.
- PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen
This screen enables the position of the tool during operation to be checked on the drawn tool path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13.2.1.1 GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen
This screen is used to set graphic parameters needed for tool path drawing.
Data set using this screen is made valid by displaying the PATH GRAPHIC screen or executing drawing. 
If a tool path is already drawn, the path is erased.
Graphic parameter data once set is preserved even if the power is turned off.
Graphic Parameter (Dynamic Graphic) Screen Procedure
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC
PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen.
Fig. 13.2.1.1 (a) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (first page)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1496 -
Fig. 13.2.1.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page)
2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen.
Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item.
3 Move the cursor to a desired setting item with the MDI cursor keys then key in a desired value with 
the numeric keys.
4 For direct input of the value set in step 3, press the key or the [INPUT] soft key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For incremental input of the value set in step 3, press the [+INPUT] soft key.
For each setting item, see the explanation.
Explanation
The setting items on the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen are described below.
- Graphic coordinate system
Select a graphic coordinate system for drawing from the following and set its number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1497 -
Y
X
Setting=0 (XY)
Z
Y
Setting=1 (ZY)
Z
Y
Setting=2 (YZ)
Z
X
Setting =3 (XZ)
Setting=5 (XYZ)
Z
X Y
Setting=6 (YXZ)
Z
Y X
X
Z
Setting=4 (ZX)
Setting=7 (YZX)
X
Y Z
Fig. 13.2.1.1 (c) Graphic coordinate system
- Scale
Set the scale factor for drawing in the range of 0.01 to 100.00 (times).
With a small scale factor, it is possible to draw within a wide range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With a large scale factor, it is possible to draw in the vicinity of the graphic center being enlarged.
- Graphic range center
To specify the center coordinates of a graphic range, set a coordinate on each axis in the workpiece
coordinate system of the program executed for drawing.
NOTE
Set a coordinate on each axis in the machine coordinate system in case of bit 3 
(BGM) of parameter No.11329=1.
- Blank figure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Blank figure
With a drawing program, set the figure, position, and dimensions of a blank to be machined.
The graphic range where the blank figure is included in the drawing area is automatically decided by the 
value set here.
NOTE
1 With a lathe system, no rectangular parallelepiped can be set.
2 With a lathe system, the Y-axis, one of the basic three axes, may not exist. In 
such a case, the Y-axis for the reference position of a blank need not be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 When a figure or dimension is set, a scale value and screen center coordinates 
are automatically set as the initial graphic range values so that the blank figure is 
located within the graphic range on the screen. Until a modification is made to 
the blank figure, dimension or the setting of the graphic coordinate system, the 
graphic range is determined by the set scale and screen center coordinates.
Figure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Figure
Select a type of blank figure from the following (Table 13.2.1.1 (a)) and set the corresponding value:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1498 -
Table 13.2.1.1 (a)
Setting Figure
0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis)
1 Rectangular parallelepiped
Position
Set the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the workpiece coordinate system.
NOTE
Set the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the machine 
coordinate system in case of bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No.11329=1.
Dimensions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Dimensions
Set the dimensions of each type of blank figure as indicated below (Table 13.2.1.1 (b)).
Table 13.2.1.1 (b)
Type of blank figure Dimension I Dimension J Dimension K
Rectangular parallelepiped Length in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis direction
Column Diameter of column 0 Length of column
Cylinder Diameter of outer circle of 
cylinder
Diameter of inner circle 
of cylinder Length of cylinder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of cylinder Length of cylinder
The relationship between the position and dimensions of a blank is shown below.
ｖ
J
K
: Reference position (X,Y,Z)
I X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
I
J
K
Fig. 13.2.1.1 (d)
- Rotation angle
Set a rotating angle of the graphic coordinate system that centers on the graphic range center. The rotating 
angle is a range of -360°-+360°.
Set a rotating angle as a reference position (position of the rotating angle 0°) on the indicated direction of 
each graphic coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Vertical plane rotation angle
Set a rotating angle at the horizontal direction center in front of the screen.
The rotation direction is as follows.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1499 -
+ -
Rotation center
Horizontal plane rotation angle
Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction center in front of the screen.
The rotation direction is as follows.
+
-
Rotation center
Screen center rotation angle
Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction center of the screen plane.
The rotation direction is as follows.
+ -
Rotation center
- Graphic color
Set colors to be used for tool path drawing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The colors that can be set are indicated below together with their setting values:
Graphic color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue White
Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Path
Set colors to be used for a drawn tool path.
Tool position
Set a graphic cursor color to be used for PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen.
- Auto erase
When drawing is started with the [START] soft key from a state where drawing is not being executed or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is not stopped temporarily, the previously drawn path can be erased.
Setting 0: The previously drawn path is not erased.
1: The previously drawn path is erased.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1500 -
- Tool offset (Path)
For tool path drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool offset function (tool length compensation, 
cutter/tool-noise radius compensation) can be selected.
Setting 0: The tool offset function is enabled for drawing.
1: The tool offset function is disabled for drawing.
13.2.1.2 PATH GRAPHIC screen
The PATH GRAPHIC screen is used to draw a tool path. The following operations can be performed:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Starting/ending tool path drawing
- Rewind of a drawing target program
- Erasing a drawn tool path
The screen is composed of the following items:
(1) Drawing area
(2) Status display of Background operation
(3) Program name and sequence number for drawing execution
(4) Current coordinates (absolute coordinates)
(5) Feedrate and M/S/T/D code instruction information
(6) Graphic coordinate system
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (a) PATH GRAPHIC screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1501 -
Path Graphic Screen Procedure
Procedure
1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC
PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen.
2 Press the [PATH EXEC] soft key. The PATH GRAPHIC screen is displayed.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (b) PATH GRAPHIC screen
3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c) PATH GRAPHIC screen (operation)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the continuous menu key to display the soft keys for enlarging/reducing/moving the 
graphic range.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (d) PATH GRAPHIC screen
(enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range)
5 Press the [COORDINATES] soft key to display the soft keys for changing the graphic coordinate 
system.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (e) PATH GRAPHIC screen
(changing the graphic coordinate system)
6 Press the [ROTATION] soft key to display the soft keys for rotating the graphic coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (f) PATH GRAPHIC screen
(rotating the graphic coordinate system)
For the operation of each soft key, see the explanation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1502 -
Explanation
- Graphic program selection
Press the [PRGRAM SELECT] soft key to select a drawing target program.
Pressing the [PRGRAM SELECT] soft key displays the program list screen.
On the program list screen, move the cursor to a desired program then press the [DRAW SELECT] soft 
key.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (g) Program list screen ([DRAW SELECT] soft key)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pressing the [DRAW SELECT] soft key selects a drawing target program and switches the screen display
to the PATH GRAPHIC screen.
The file whose name is prefixed by a "#" mark on the program list screen is selected as the drawing target
program. And the mark of "+" is displayed in the file that has been selected as a program for drawing in 
other path systems.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (h) Program list screen (drawing target program selection state)
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
The file that can be selected as the drawing target program is only a file that can 
be selected as the main program.
- Rewind of a drawing target program
If the execution of drawing of a selected program has ended or is stopped halfway, press the [REWIND] 
soft key to restart drawing from the beginning of the program.
- Starting / Stopping drawing
To draw the tool path of a program selected for drawing, press one of the following soft keys displayed
by step 3 mentioned above:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by step 3 mentioned above:
- [START] soft key
This soft key starts drawing from the head of the program.
- [1BLOCK] soft key
This soft key executes the program for drawing and stops temporarily on a block-by-block basis as 
with ordinary single block stop operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1503 -
If a program is executed with a soft key above, the soft key display is changed to the following:
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (i) Soft keys displayed during drawing execution
The operations of these soft keys are as follows:
• [STOP] soft key
This soft key terminates the execution of the drawing target program to stop drawing.
• [PAUSE] soft key
This soft key temporarily stops the execution of the drawing target program to stop drawing
temporarily.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
temporarily.
• [1BLOCK] soft key
This soft key executes the program for drawing and stops drawing temporarily on a block-by-block
basis as with ordinary single block stop operation.
• [RESTART] soft key
If the [RESTART] soft key is pressed in the stop state set by the [PAUSE] soft key or the 
[1BLOCK] soft key, the execution of drawing can be restarted from the block where drawing is 
stopped.
NOTE
When the new path was drawn by the operation of starting drawing without


key: chroma:document
string_value:
erasing of the old path before the operation, it is impossible to redraw the old 
path by each operation of enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range and 
changing/rotating the graphic coordinate system.
The state of drawing is indicated as follows:
DRAWING: Indicates that drawing is being executed.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (j) State indication during drawing
STOP: Indicates that drawing is temporarily stopped.
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (k) State indication during temporary stop


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1504 -
Fig. 13.2.1.2 (l) State indication during occurring of alarm
- End of drawing
When M02 or M30 is executed, the program executed for drawing terminates drawing.
Upon program termination, the soft key display returns to the soft keys (Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c)) displayed
before drawing is started.
- Erasing a drawn tool path
Press the [ERASE] soft key to erase a drawn tool path.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 If the screen display is switched or the path is switched during tool path drawing, 
the background operation is stopped to end drawing.
2 A tool path once drawn is erased when the screen display is switched or the path 
is switched.
- Enlarging/reducing the graphic range
The following soft keys displayed by step 4 are used:
- [LARGE] soft key
This soft key increases the scale to enlarge the graphic range.
- [SMALL] soft key
This soft key decreases the scale to reduce the graphic range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- [AUTO] soft key
When the blank figure specified in a graphic parameter is input, this soft key automatically scales the 
graphic range so that the blank figure is contained within the graphic range.
If no blank figure is input, this soft key has no effect.
NOTE
1 Set the unit of scale for one enlargement/reduction operation in parameter No.
14713.
2 An enlargement/reduction scale used here is set in the graphic parameter for 
scale.
- Moving the graphic range


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Moving the graphic range
The following soft keys displayed by step 4 are used:
- [←MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range to left.
- [MOVE→] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range to right.
- [↑MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range upward.
- [↓MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range downward.
- [CENTER] soft key
This soft key returns the graphic range to the original position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1505 -
NOTE
1 Set the travel increment made by one horizontal move operation in parameter 
No. 14714.
2 Set the travel increment made by one vertical move operation in parameter No.
14715.
3 The graphic range modified here is not set in the graphic parameter for graphic 
range center.
- Changing the graphic coordinate system
The following soft keys displayed by step 5 are used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A graphic coordinate system selected here is the same one as set in the graphic parameter for the graphic
coordinate system.
- [XY] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XY (with a setting of 0).
- [ZY] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of ZY (with a setting of 1).
- [YZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YZ (with a setting of 2).
- [XZ] soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- [XZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XZ (with a setting of 3).
- [ZX] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of ZX (with a setting of 4).
- [XYZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XYZ (with a setting of 5).
- [YXZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YXZ (with a setting of 6).
- [YZX] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YZX (with a setting of 7).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- [OK] soft key
This soft key changes the current graphic coordinate system to the graphic coordinate system
selected by one of the soft keys above.
- [CANCEL] soft key
This soft key cancels the graphic coordinate system selected by one of the soft keys above to return 
to the original graphic coordinate system.
NOTE
The graphic coordinate system selected here is set in the graphic parameter for 
the graphic coordinate system.
- Rotating the graphic coordinate system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following soft keys displayed by step 6 are used.
- [↑] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system upward.
- [↓] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system downward.
- [←] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system to left.
- [→] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system to right.
- [CW] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system clockwise.
- [CCW] soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1506 -
- [OK] soft key
This soft key changes the rotation angle of the current graphic coordinate system to the one set by 
one of the soft keys above.
- [CANCEL] soft key
This soft key cancels the rotation of the graphic coordinate system performed by one of the soft keys 
above to return to the original graphic coordinate system.
NOTE
1 Set the travel increment made by one rotation operation in parameter No. 14716.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 The rotation angle of the graphic coordinate system set here is not set in the 
graphic parameter for rotation angle.
13.2.1.3 PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen
The tool position during operation can be checked by displaying the cursor for indicating the tool position
during operation on the tool path drawn on the PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen.
The screen is composed of the following items:
(1) Drawing area
(2) Current coordinates (absolute coordinates)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Feedrate and M/S/T/D code instruction information
(4) Graphic coordinate system
(5) Cursor to show tool position
Fig. 13.2.1.3 (a) PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1507 -
Path Graphic (Tool Position) Screen Procedure
Procedure
1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the PATH 
GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen.
2 Press the [TOOL POS] soft key.
The screen display changes to the PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen and the cursor
indicating the tool position is displayed.
Fig. 13.2.1.3 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For the method of checking the current tool position, see the explanation.
Pressing a soft key other than the [TOOL POS] soft key displays the corresponding screen.
Explanation
Use the following procedure to check the tool position during operation on the PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL 
POSITION) screen:
(1) Select a drawing target program for operation.
(2) Draw the tool path of the selected program on the PATH GRAPHIC screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) After the end of drawing, switch the screen display to the PATH GRAPHIC (TOOL POSITION) 
screen.
(4) Start automatic operation with the program executed for tool path drawing.
After automatic operation is started, the blinking cursor moves along the drawn tool path as the tool
moves. The cursor blinking rate is fast when the tool is moving, and the cursor blinking rate is slow when 
the tool is stopped.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the tool is stopped.
The following items displayed on the screen are provided for the program under automatic operation:
- Current coordinates
- Feedrate and M/S/T/D code specification information


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1508 -
NOTE
1 A tool path drawn by setting the tool offset parameter to 1 (to disable the tool
offset function) is different from the actual tool path. In this case, the cursor
indicating the tool position may not move along the drawn tool path.
2 The tool path cannot be drawn correctly if a command not supporting drawing or 
a command that specifies operation different from operation performed during


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawing is specified or if an operation dependent on the operation state or 
setting on the machine side is performed. So, the tool path in actual operation
may differ from a drawn tool path. In this case, the cursor indicating the tool
position does not move along the drawn tool path.
3 When the graphic parameter of the graphic coordinate system, scale, graphic 
range center, blank figure / position / dimensions and rotation angle is changed, 
the drawn tool path drawn is erased.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Therefore, please draw the tool path again on the PATH GRAPHIC screen to 
display the tool position by setting the changed graphic parameter.
13.2.2 Animation
Overview
For animation drawing, make necessary settings and perform operations for drawing execution on the 
following screens:
- GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen
On this screen, data required to execute animation drawing can be set.
- ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen
This screen is used for animation drawing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
On this screen, the graphic range can be reduced/enlarged, and the graphic coordinate system can be 
rotated.
NOTE
To execute animation drawing, set directions of the axes of the machine
(parameter No.14706).
13.2.2.1 GRAPHIC PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen
This screen is used to set graphic parameters needed for animation drawing.
Data set using this screen is made valid by displaying the ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen or executing
drawing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawing. 
Graphic parameter data once set is preserved even if the power is turned off.
Graphic Parameter (Dynamic Graphic) Screen Procedure
Procedure
1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC
PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1509 -
Fig. 13.2.2.1 (a) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (first page)
Fig. 13.2.2.1 (b) GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen (second page)
2 Two screens are used for the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen.
Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item.
3 Move the cursor to a desired setting item with the MDI cursor keys then key in a desired value with 
the numeric keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the numeric keys.
4 For direct input of the value set in step 3, press the key or the [INPUT] soft key.
For incremental input of the value set in step 3, press the [+INPUT] soft key.
For each setting item, see the explanation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1510 -
Explanation
The setting items on the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen are described below.
However, the graphic parameters listed below are shared for tool path drawing. So, refer to the 
explanation of the GRAPHIC PARAMETER screen for tool path drawing.
- Graphic coordinate system
- Scale
- Graphic range center
- Rotation angles (vertical plane, horizontal plane, screen center)
- Blank figure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Blank figure
With a drawing program, set the figure, position, and dimensions of a blank to be machined.
NOTE
1 With a lathe system, no rectangular parallelepiped can be set.
2 With a lathe system, the Y-axis, one of the basic three axes, may not exist. In 
such a case, the Y-axis for the reference position of a blank need not be set.
3 When a figure or dimension is set, a scale value and screen center coordinates


key: chroma:document
string_value:
are automatically set as the initial graphic range values so that the blank figure is 
located within the graphic range on the screen. Until a modification is made to 
the blank figure, dimension or the setting of the graphic coordinate system, the 
graphic range is determined by the set scale and screen center coordinates.
Figure
Select a type of blank figure from the following and set the corresponding value:
Setting Figure
0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Rectangular parallelepiped
Position
Set the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the workpiece coordinate system.
NOTE
Set the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the machine 
coordinate system in case of bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No.11329=1.
Dimensions
Set the dimensions of each type of blank figure as indicated below.
Type of blank figure Dimension I Dimension J Dimension K
Rectangular


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Rectangular 
parallelepiped Length in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis direction
Column Diameter of column 0 Length of column
Cylinder Diameter of outer circle of 
cylinder
Diameter of inner circle of 
cylinder Length of cylinder
The relationship between the position and dimensions of a blank is shown below (Fig. 13.2.2.1 (c)).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1511 -
ｖ
J
K
: Reference position (X,Y,Z)
I X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
I
J
K
Fig. 13.2.2.1 (c)
- Graphic color
Set colors to be used for animation drawing.
The colors that can be set are indicated below together with their setting values:
Graphic color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue White
Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blank
Set the color of a blank to be drawn in animation drawing.
Tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Tool
Set the color of a tool to be drawn in animation drawing.
- Tool length offset (Anime)
For animation drawing, whether to enable or disable the tool length offset can be selected.
Setting 0: The tool length offset is disabled for drawing.
1: The tool length offset is enabled for drawing.
NOTE
In animation drawing, the cutter/tool-noise radius compensation is always
enabled for drawing.
13.2.2.2 ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is used to draw a animation. The following operations can be 
performed:
- Starting/ending animation drawing
- Rewind of a drawing target program
- Initializing a blank
- Enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range
- Rotating the graphic coordinate system
The screen configuration is as follows:
(1) Drawing area
(2) Status display of Background operation
(3) Program name and sequence number for drawing execution
(4) Current coordinates (absolute coordinates)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1512 -
(6) Graphic coordinate system
(7) Material position, Material dimension, Scale, Graphic range center of graphic Parameter
(8) Tool name
Fig. 13.2.2.2 (a) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen
Animation Graphic Screen Procedure
Procedure
1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the GRAPHIC
PARAMETER (DYNAMIC GRAPHIC) screen.
2 Press the [ANIME EXEC] soft key. The ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1513 -
3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed.
Fig. 13.2.2.2 (c) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen (operation)
4 Press the continuous menu key to display the soft keys for enlarging/reducing/moving the 
graphic range.
Fig. 13.2.2.2 (d) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen
(enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range)
5 Press the [COORDINATES] soft key to display the soft keys for changing the graphic coordinate 
system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
system.
Fig. 13.2.2.2 (e) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen
(changing the graphic coordinate system)
6 Press the [ROTATION] soft key to display the soft keys for rotating the graphic coordinate system.
Fig. 13.2.2.2 (f) ANIMATION GRAPHIC screen
(rotating the graphic coordinate system)
For the operation of each soft key, see the explanation.
Explanation
The operations listed below are the same operations as for the tool path drawing screen. See the 
explanation of the tool path drawing screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Graphic program selection
- Rewind of a drawing target program
- Starting / Stopping of drawing
- End of drawing
- Initializing a blank
Press the [INIT.] soft key to initialize and return a drawn machining profile to the original blank figure.
NOTE
1 Blank initialization can also be performed by any of the following operations:
- Start of drawing
- Changing of the graphic coordinate system and graphic range by performing 
enlargement/reduction/movement/rotation operations
- Change of screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Change of screen
2 A machining profile once drawn for a blank is erased when the screen or the 
path is switched.
- Enlarging/reducing the graphic range
The following soft keys displayed by step 4 are used:
- [LARGE] soft key
This soft key increases the scale to enlarge the graphic range.
- [SMALL] soft key
This soft key decreases the scale to reduce the graphic range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1514 -
- [AUTO] soft key
When the blank figure specified in a graphic parameter is input, this soft key automatically scales the 
graphic range so that the blank figure is contained within the graphic range.
If no blank figure is input, this soft key has no effect.
NOTE
1 Set the unit of scale for one enlargement/reduction operation in parameter No.
14713.
2 An enlargement/reduction scale used here is set in the graphic parameter for 
scale.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
scale.
- Moving the graphic range
The following soft keys displayed by step 4 are used:
- [←MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range to left.
- [MOVE→] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range to right.
- [↑MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range upward.
- [↓MOVE] soft key
This soft key moves the graphic range downward.
- [CENTER] soft key
This soft key returns the graphic range to the original position.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 Set the travel increment made by one horizontal move operation in parameter 
No. 14714.
2 Set the travel increment made by one vertical move operation in parameter No.
14715.
3 The graphic range modified here is not set in the graphic parameter for graphic 
range center.
- Changing the graphic coordinate system
The following soft keys displayed by step 5 are used.
A graphic coordinate system selected here is the same one as set in the graphic parameter for the graphic
coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
coordinate system.
- [XY] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XY (with a setting of 0).
- [ZY] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of ZY (with a setting of 1).
- [YZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YZ (with a setting of 2).
- [XZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XZ (with a setting of 3).
- [ZX] soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- [ZX] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of ZX (with a setting of 4).
- [XYZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XYZ (with a setting of 5).
- [YXZ] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YXZ (with a setting of 6).
- [YZX] soft key
This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of YZX (with a setting of 7).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1515 -
- [OK] soft key
This soft key changes the current graphic coordinate system to the graphic coordinate system
selected by one of the soft keys above.
- [CANCEL] soft key
This soft key cancels the graphic coordinate system selected by one of the soft keys above to return 
to the original graphic coordinate system.
NOTE
The graphic coordinate system selected here is set in the graphic parameter for 
the graphic coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the graphic coordinate system.
- Rotating the graphic coordinate system
The following soft keys displayed by step 6 are used.
- [↑] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system upward.
- [↓] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system downward.
- [←] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system to left.
- [→] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system to right.
- [CW] soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- [CW] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system clockwise.
- [CCW] soft key
This soft key rotates the graphic coordinate system counterclockwise.
- [OK] soft key
This soft key changes the rotation angle of the current graphic coordinate system to the one set by 
one of the soft keys above.
- [CANCEL] soft key
This soft key cancels the rotation of the graphic coordinate system performed by one of the soft keys 
above to return to the original graphic coordinate system.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 Set the travel increment made by one rotation operation in parameter No. 14716.
2 The rotation angle of the graphic coordinate system set here is not set in the 
graphic parameter for rotation angle.
- Drawing of a tool
In animation drawing, not only a blank figure but also a tool figure is drawn in three dimensions.
NOTE
The following function is necessary to draw in the tool figure.
- Tool geometry size data 100/300 pairs
Figure data
For tool figure drawing, the following data is used:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tool geometry size data 100/300 pairs
- Tool compensation data (tool-nose radius compensation value, virtual tool tip direction, cutter 
compensation value)
- Parameters
The table below indicates the drawable types of tools and figure data of each type of tool.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1516 -
Table 13.2.2.2 (a) List of drawable tools (for turning)
Tool name Tool geometry size data Tool
compensation Parameter No.
General-purpose tool Setting Tip position No.27350#0
Cutting edge angle Cutting edge length No.27351
Tool angle Holder length No.27352
Holder width No.27353
Holder length 2 No.27354
Holder width 2 No.27355
Threading tool Setting Tip position No.27356#0
Tool angle Cutting edge width No.27357
Holder length No.27358


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Holder length No.27358
Holder width No.27359
Grooving tool Setting Tip position No.27360#0
Tip width Holder length No.27361
Tip length Holder width No.27362
Round-nose tool Setting Tool-nose radius Tip position No.27363#0
Tip length Virtual tool tip Holder length No.27364
Holder width No.27365
Point nose straight Setting Tip position No.27366#0
tool Cutting edge angle Cutting edge length No.27367
Tool angle Holder length No.27368
Holder width No.27369
Holder length 2 No.27370


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Holder length 2 No.27370
Holder width 2 No.27371
Versatile tool Setting Tip position No.27384#0
Tip width Holder length No.27385
Tip length Holder width No.27386
Table 13.2.2.2 (b) List of drawable tools (for milling)
Tool name Tool geometry size data Cutter compensation Parameter No.
Drill Setting Diameter Tip length No.27372
Tool angle
counter sink tool Setting Small diameter Tool angle No.27375
Cutter diameter Tip length No.27376
Cutter length No.27377
Shank length No.27378


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Shank length No.27378
Shank diameter No.27379
Flat end mill Setting Diameter Tip length No.27373
Ball end mill Setting Diameter Tip length No.27380
Tap Setting Diameter Tip length No.27374
Reamer Setting Diameter Tip length No.27381
Boring tool Setting Diameter Tip length No.27382
Face mill Setting Diameter Tip length No.27383
NOTE
In lathes system, the round-nose tool and milling tools can be drawn only when 
the cutter compensation/tool-nose radius compensation function is provided.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1517 -
Timing of drawing
If a code indicated below is specified during drawing execution, a tool figure is drawn according to the 
tool geometry size data that has the same number as the code.
- With a lathe system 
T code command
If three numbers, namely, a tool number, tool geometry offset number, and tool wear offset number, 
are specified in a T code, the tool geometry size data that has the same number as the tool geometry


key: chroma:document
string_value:
offset number is obtained.
NOTE
When the tool management function is provided, a tool offset is specified with a 
D code. So, the tool geometry size data that has the offset number indicated by 
the D code is obtained.
- With a machining center system
D code command
If the tool geometry size data corresponding to a specified number does not exist or the tool geometry size 
data is not set correctly, tool drawing is disabled with the warning "ILLEGAL SETTING OF TOOL
FIGURE DATA".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FIGURE DATA".
13.2.3 Programmable Data Input (G10) for Blank Figure Drawing 
Parameters
Overview
Each of the drawing parameters for a blank figure, a position, and dimensions that are for the automatic 
scaling of the drawing areas of tool path drawing and animation drawing with the dynamic graphic 
display function can be set with an NC program, using the programmable data input command (G10 
command).
Format
G10 L90 P_ IP_ I_ J_ K_ ;
P_ : Blank figure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
P_ : Blank figure
IP_ : Addresses of the basic three axes and the reference position of a blank
I_,J_,K_ : Dimensions of a blank
NOTE
1 This command is enabled only during the execution of drawing. It is ignored 
during normal automatic operation.
2 This command is a one-shot G code.
3 This command must be specified in a single block.
Explanation
- Blank figure (P_)
Specify the type of a blank figure with either of the following settings for shapes.
Setting Figure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Setting Figure
0 Column or cylinder (parallel with the Z-axis)
1 Rectangular parallelepiped
The specified value is set in parameter No. 11343.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1518 -
- Reference position of a blank (IP_)
Specify the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the workpiece coordinate system.
NOTE
Specify the reference position of a blank with coordinates (X,Y,Z) in the machine 
coordinate system in case of bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No.11329=1.
The specified value is set in parameter No. 11344.
- Dimensions of a blank (I_,J_,K_)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For the shape of each blank, specify the dimensions of the blank as follows:
Blank figure Address I Address J Address K
Rectangular 
parallelepiped Length in X-axis direction Length in Y-axis direction Length in Z-axis direction
Column Diameter of column 0 Length of column
Cylinder Diameter of outer circle of 
cylinder
Diameter of inner circle of 
cylinder Length of cylinder
The specified value are set in parameter No.11345 (address I), parameter No.11346 (address J), and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No.11347 (address K).
- Relationship between the position and dimensions of a blank
The relationship between the position and dimensions of a blank is shown in the figure below (Fig. 
13.2.3).
J
K
: Reference position (X,Y,Z)
I X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
I
J
K
Fig. 13.2.3
- Operation to be performed when this command is issued
When this command is executed in the background operation, the specified values are set in the drawing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameters for the blank figure, reference position, and dimensions that correspond to the specified 
arguments, and the drawing area is automatically set again with the values set.
This causes this command and subsequent commands to perform drawing in the new drawing area.
NOTE
Before this command, drawing is performed as described below.
- The tool path is erased.
- In animation drawing, the blank figure is initialized.
- The drawing start position and the tool figure become ineffective.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1519 -
13.2.4 Warning Messages
Warning message Content
START REJECTED This program cannot be drawn.
NO PROGRAM SELECTED No drawing target program is selected.
UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN DRAWING An NC statement/macro statement that can not execute 
drawing is instructed.
ILLEGAL SETTING OF GRAPHIC PARAMETERS Graphic parameters are not set correctly.
ILLEGAL SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE DATA (a) Tool figure data are not set correctly


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) Tool figure data don’t exist
(c) Parameter No.14706 is not set
13.2.5 Note
NOTE
1 The coordinates used in drawing are absolute coordinates.
Therefore, even if the coordinate system is changed while it is drawing, it draws 
in the coordinate system when having begun to draw.
However, if bit 3 (BGM) of parameter No.11329 is set to 1, it draws by the 
machine coordinates value.
2 The drawing target axes are the basic three axes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The basic three axes are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis on the basic coordinate
system set with parameter No.1022.
3 In a drawing program having a sequence of contiguous small blocks, drawing 
requires longer processing time, possibly causing machining time to become 
longer than actual machining time.
4 When drawing is executed, data is treated as described below.
(1) Parameters
The same parameters as for automatic operation are used. However,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameters cannot be rewritten with a command such as the G10 command.
If an attempt is made to rewrite a parameter with programmable parameter
input (G10L52), the command is ignored.
However, by setting bit 7 (GST) of parameter No.11329, drawing can be 
temporarily stopped with the warning "UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN 
DRAWING".
(2) Tool compensation value/workpiece origin offset/extended workpiece origin
offset/macro variable, etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
offset/macro variable, etc.
For each of drawing execution and automatic operation, separate data is 
used. At the start of drawing, data for drawing is produced by copying data
for automatic operation. In subsequent operations, the data for drawing and 
the data for automatic operation are treated independently of each other. So, 
even if data is rewritten with a command such as G10, drawing execution
and automatic operation do not affect each other. Note, however, that data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
rewritten in drawing execution is not reflected in the data for automatic
operation but is deleted.
(3) Tool life management data, tool number offset data
These data items are not used for drawing execution. So, if an attempt is 
made to rewrite data with G10, the command is ignored.
However, by setting bit 7 (GST) of parameter No.11329, drawing can be 
temporarily stopped with the warning "UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN 
DRAWING".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1520 -
13.2.6 Restrictions
- Simultaneous drawing with multiple paths
This function does not support simultaneous tool path drawing by program execution with multiple paths.
For example, the tool paths of programs executed simultaneously with multiple paths on a 2-path or 
3-path lathe or a combined machine tool cannot be drawn. This function supports only drawing executed
singly with a single path.
- Simultaneous multi-path display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The screens of this function do not support simultaneous multi-path display based on the setting of 
parameter No. 13131 and No. 13132.
- Functions that operate differently in drawing execution and automatic
operation
The operations of the following functions in drawing execution differ from the operations in automatic
operation:
1. Operations that differ, depending on the custom macro
1) Interface signal
#1000 to #1035 are assumed to be 0 at all times.
2) Message output


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2) Message output
A message to be output with #3006 is not displayed but is ignored.
3) clock
#3001 and #3002 are ignored. So, note that drawing is not continued, for example, if the 
following is specified:
#3001=0 ;
WHILE [#3001 LE 100] DO1 ;
END1 ;
4) Mirror image
#3007 is assumed to be 0 at all times.
5) Program-restarted state
#3008 is assumed to be 0 at all times.
6) External output command
BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, and PCLOS are ignored.
2 Functions that perform partly different operations


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1) When G28 (automatic reference position return) is specified, up to the intermediate point is 
drawn.
2) When G29 (automatic return from the reference position) is specified, drawing is performed
from the intermediate point.
3) When G27 (reference position return check) is specified, no reference position return check is 
made.
4) No stored stroke limit check is made.
5) When G31 (skip function), or G31.1, G31.2, or G31.3 (multistage skip function) is specified,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawing is performed up to the specified position, regardless of the skip signal.
6) When G60 (single direction positioning, only Machining center system) is specified, drawing is 
performed directly up to the specified position at all times even if the positioning direction is 
opposite.
3. Functions that perform different operations
If the following functions are specified, the operations described below result:
G07.1 (cylindrical interpolation)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 13. GRAPHIC FUNCTION
- 1521 -
- Functions that do not support drawing
The following functions are ignored in drawing execution:
1) G04 (dwell)
2) G20, G21 (inch/metric switch)
3) Auxiliary function (M, S, T, B)
4) G22, G23 (stored stroke limit check on/off)
5) G10.6 (tool retract data setting)
6) G25/G26 (spindle variation detection on/off)
7) G10 (programmable data input)
NOTE
If G10 (programmable data input) is specified, drawing can be temporarily


